2015
OWNER’S MANUAL
Viper SRT
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2015 FCA US LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
1
4 INTRODUCTION
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techCongratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC
nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfacvehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmantion.
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from
Vehicle Identification Number
outside the vehicle through the windshield. This number NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
also appears on the top surface of the right-hand side
tunnel frame rail near the center of the vehicle, the
outboard facing surface of the right-hand side B-Pillar
frame rail, as well as the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the
vehicle registration, and the title.
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .13 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .20
䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ To Unlock The Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ To Unlatch The Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM . . . . . . .17
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .22
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .22
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .44
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 䡵 BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . . . .81
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
▫ Auto-Down Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
▫ AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
▫ Reset Auto-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
NOTE: In case the ignition does not change with the
push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
have a low or dead battery.
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN).
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
feature, (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go⬙ in ⬙Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further information).
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with
the push of a button, as long as the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment.
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating
positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate 1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and 3 — ON/RUN
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
RUN will illuminate.
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You
can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb
and then pull the key out with your other hand.
NOTE: In the event that the FOB does not start the
vehicle (⬙FOB not Found⬙ message) use the FOB nose
(furthest point from key ring) and push the start button.
FOB replaces the finger.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
NOTE: With the Uconnect® system, the power window
switches, radio and power outlets will remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer
to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Emergency Key Removal
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime,
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the
cluster.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from vehicle, place the ignition
in the OFF and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
SENTRY KEY®
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node
(KIN) and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank
with an invalid Key Fob.
CAUTION!
• Do not make modifications or alterations to the
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
the immobilization system may result in a loss of
security protection.
• The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the system. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
engine being shut off after two seconds.
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal Replacement Keys
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the system. NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
possible by an authorized dealer.
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
NOTE: Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an • This device may not cause harmful interference.
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of program• This device must accept any interference that may be
ming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank
received, including interference that may cause undeKey Fob is one that has never been programmed.
sired operation.
When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer System serNOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
viced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
dealer.
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors, liftgate,
and hood for unauthorized entry and the ignition for
unauthorized operation. If something triggers the alarm,
the Vehicle Security Alarm will prevent the vehicle from
starting. It will also sound the horn and flash the park
lights, and taillights.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
Rearming Of The System
Entering The Liftgate With The System Armed
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
NOTE: Using the key to open the liftgate while the
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
Vehicle Security Alarm is armed will trigger the alarm.
horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
(flashing lights) after 15 minutes, and then rearm itself. Push the LIFTGATE release button on the RKE transmitter twice to allow access without triggering the alarm or
To Arm The System
having to disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. Then,
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
within 30 seconds, open the liftgate by using the key
cylinder or the LIFTGATE release switch located in the
1. Make sure the vehicle ignition system is in the ⬙OFF⬙
exterior liftgate handle.
position.
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
the following methods:
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
• Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
To Disarm The System
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position:
• Push the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Start/Stop button
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
NOTE:
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Tamper Alert
• The liftgate key cylinder cannot arm or disarm the
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
Vehicle Security Alarm.
your absence, the horn will sound three times, and the
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
Electronic Immobilization System
The Electronic Immobilization system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The interior lights will turn on whenever a door is
opened or the liftgate is opened and the dimmer switch is
not in the defeat position.
The interior lights will turn on, remain on for approximately 30 seconds, and then fade to off if any of the
following occur:
• A door is opened using the outside door handle and
then closed.
• A door is unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
The interior lights will turn on, remain on for about four
seconds, and then fade to off if a door is opened using the
inside door handle.
NOTE: None of the courtesy lights will operate if the
dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme
downward position), unless the overhead map/reading
lights are turned on manually.
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
To Unlock The Doors
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors
and liftgate, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances
up to approximately 66ft (20 m) using a hand-held Key
Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not
need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice to
unlock both doors and the liftgate. The park lights and
turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the signal,
and the illuminated entry system will turn on. Refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
will illuminate in
NOTE: The Door Unlock Indicator
the instrument cluster when one or both doors are
unlocked.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/Both Doors First
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
Flash Lights With Lock
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature lets you program the lights to flash when the
doors are locked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “ Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Unlock On 1st Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Unlatch The Liftgate
Push the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter two
times within five seconds to unlatch the liftgate.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
ter to lock the doors. The horn will chirp once, and the headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, the
park lights and turn signal lights will flash to acknowl- horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will
edge the signal.
turn on.
To Lock The Doors
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless Transmitter Battery Replacement
you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph battery.
(24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
NOTE: The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the
ignition switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while • Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
the Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
and horn will remain on.
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
Programming Additional Transmitters
housing or the printed circuit board.
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be 1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
performed at an authorized dealer.
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
other hand.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
2
Emergency Key Removal
Separating The RKE Transmitter Case
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade 3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
the seal during removal.
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it distance, check for these two conditions:
with rubbing alcohol.
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
General Information
radios.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the DOOR LOCKS
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
WARNING!
• Do not touch the exhaust pipe sill covers when
entering or exiting your vehicle. They can be hot
enough to burn you. Observe the warning labels on
each door closure panel.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
WARNING! (Continued)
• For personal security in the event of an collision,
lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when
you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always cycle the ignition
to the OFF mode lock, and lock your vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
severe personal injuries and death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
injured seriously or fatally. Don’t leave the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each door trim panel. Use
this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
(Continued)
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any front door
is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents
you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle.
Cycling the ignition to the OFF position or closing the
door will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open, and
the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, a chime
will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob.
will illuminate in
NOTE: The Door Unlock Indicator
the instrument cluster when one or both doors are
unlocked.
Automatic Door Locks
Power Door Lock Switch
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see your authorized dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
WINDOWS
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with Power Windows
power door locks if:
The window controls on the driver’s door control both of
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en- the door windows.
abled.
2. The driver door is opened.
3. The doors were not previously unlocked.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
Power Window Switches
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
There are single window controls on the passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door window.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
WARNING! (Continued)
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
The power window switches will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in- Auto-Down Feature
formation.
Both power window switches have an AUTO-down
feature. Push the window switch to the second detent,
WARNING!
release, and the window will go down automatically.
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do To open the window part way, push the window switch
not let children play with power windows. Do not to the first detent and release it when you want the
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a window to stop.
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
• If the window detects an obstacle 10 times in a row, the
auto–up feature unlearns.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent, and release it when you want the window
to stop.
Reset Auto-Up
NOTE:
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto- may need to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back 1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window
switch again to close the window.
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during autoclosure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
LIFTGATE
The liftgate can be unlocked or locked by the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, the manual lock cylinder located on the rear panel, or by activating either of
the power door lock switches located on the door trim
panels.
Rear Panel Manual Lock Cylinder
To unlock the liftgate with the RKE transmitter, push the
LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter two times.
Once unlocked, the liftgate can be opened or closed. To
open the liftgate, push the LIFTGATE RELEASE switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
located under the right side of the tail panel, which is • When all doors are locked (except for RKE transmitter
located below the liftgate, then pull the liftgate open with
liftgate access). Refer to “Entering the Liftgate with the
System Armed” under “Vehicle Security Alarm Sysone fluid motion.
tem” for additional information.
The liftgate ajar icon will illuminate in the Driver Information Display (DID) when the liftgate is open.
WARNING!
Pull Up On The Liftgate
NOTE: The liftgate release switch will be ignored under
the following conditions:
• When vehicle speed is not 0 mph (0 km/h).
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position. Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera- risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
Some of the most important safety features in your
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
vehicle are the restraint systems:
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”).
• Seat Belt Systems
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should
be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child
• Child Restraints
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chilImportant Safety Precautions:
dren who do not use child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
Please pay close attention to the information in this
up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passenger as safe as 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
possible.
them or under their arm.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your Seat Belt Systems
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
between you and the door and you could be injured. on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be happen far away from home or on your own street.
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are buckled. The driver should instruct all other occube belted at all times.
pants to buckle their seat belts. If an outboard front seat
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5
(BeltAlert)
MPH (8 km/h), BeltAlert will provide both audio and
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver visual notification.
and outboard front passenger (if equipped with outThe outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
board front passenger BeltAlert) to buckle their seat
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition is in
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy
the START or ON/RUN position. If the driver or
object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the
outboard front seat passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
outboard front seat belts are buckled.
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle and cargo is properly stowed.
speed is over 5 MPH (8 km/h) by blinking the Seat Belt
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authoReminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactiOnce the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
vating BeltAlert.
duration or until the respective seat belts are buckled.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the
driver’s or outboard front passenger’s (if equipped with
BeltAlert) seat belt remains unbuckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
(Continued)
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces 6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180° to
create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
Positioning The Lap Belt
plate.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort- 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
the latch plate.
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the seat belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) — If Equipped
The seat belt in the passenger seating position is
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat equipped with a switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt” in the “Child Restraints” section of this manual If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
for additional information. The table below defines the ALR and is being used for normal usage:
type of feature for each seating position.
Only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so
as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you
will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow
the webbing to retract completely in this case and then
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary
to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section.
Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
⬙click.⬙
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The Automatic
Locking Mode is available on all passenger seating
positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the
Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is
installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
feature. Children 12 years old and under should always 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
(Continued)
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Advanced Front Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Seat Belt Pretenioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
• Seat Track Position Sensors
Air Bag System Components
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag • Occupant Classification System
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air Bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words
SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
2
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Impact Bolster
Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage Advanced Front Air Bags.
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
Advanced Air Bag Features
This vehicle has an Occupant Classification System
(“OCS”) in the right front passenger seat. The OCS is
designed to deactivate the front Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag for an unoccupied seat and for occupants
classified in a category other than a properly seated
adult. This could be a child, teenager, or even an adult.
The Passenger Air Bag Disable (“PAD”) Indicator Light
(an amber light located in the center of the instrument
panel) tells the driver and front passenger when the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. The
PAD Indicator Light illuminates the words “PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF” to show that the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag will not inflate during a collision.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel,
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bags to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
(Continued)
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) - Front
Passenger Seat
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for
this vehicle. It is designed to deactivate the front passenger Advanced Front Air Bag for an unoccupied seat and
for occupants classified in a category other than a prop- The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the
erly seated adult. This could be a child, teenager, or even following:
an adult.
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Occupant Classification Module (OCM) located underneath the front passenger seat
• Bladder located beneath the passenger seat cushion
foam
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Passenger Air Bag Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light – an Bladder
amber light located in the center of the instrument
The Bladder is located beneath the passenger seat cushpanel
ion foam. The Bladder sends signals to the OCM for
• Air Bag Warning Light
classifying the occupant in the front passenger seat. Any
weight on the seat will be sensed by the Bladder. In order
Occupant Classification Module (OCM)
for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important for the
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located front passenger to be seated properly and properly
underneath the front passenger seat. The OCM uses wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passengers are:
input from the Bladder to determine the front passen• Sitting upright
ger’s most probable classification. The OCM communicates this information to the ORC. The ORC may deacti- • Facing forward
vate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
• Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfortbased on occupant classification.
ably on or near the floor
• Sitting with their back against the seat back and the
seat back in an upright position
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
The Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may be deactivated if the OCS estimates that:
• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects on it
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
child restraint
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a child,
including a child seated in a forward-facing child
restraint or booster seat
Seated Properly
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a small passenger, including a small adult
• The front passenger is not properly seated or his/her
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System
Passenger Seat
Occupant
Status
Unoccupied
seat *
Grocery bags,
heavy briefcases, and other
relatively light
objects
Rearward facing
infant seat**
Passenger
Advanced Air
Bag Disabled
Indicator Light
(“PAD”) Status
NOT ILLUMINATED
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
Passenger Air
Bag Status
DEACTIVATED
DEACTIVATED
DEACTIVATED
Passenger Seat
Occupant
Status
Child, including
a child seated in
a forwardfacing child restraint or
booster seat**
Small adult
Properly seated
adult
Passenger
Advanced Air
Bag Disabled
Indicator Light
(“PAD”) Status
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
Passenger Air
Bag Status
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
NOT ILLUMINATED
DEACTIVATED
DEACTIVATED
ACTIVATED
* When the right front passenger seat is empty or when
very light objects are placed on the seat, the passenger
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
Advanced Front Air Bag will not inflate even though the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not inflate even
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System Indicator Light though the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated.
is NOT illuminated.
The PAD Indicator Light should not be illuminated when
** It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, an adult passenger is properly seated in the front passenallowing the deployment of the passenger Advanced ger seat. Drivers and adult passengers should verify that
Front Air Bag. Never allow children to ride in the front the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult
passenger seat and never install a child restraint system, is riding in the front passenger seat. If an adult is not
seated properly the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
including a rear-facing child restraint, in this vehicle.
may be deactivated and the PAD Indicator Light will be
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled (PAD)
illuminated.
Indicator Light
The PAD Indicator Light should be illuminated and the
The PAD Indicator Light (an amber light located in the
center of the instrument panel) tells the driver and front Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag should be deactivated
for most properly seated and restrained children in the
passenger when the passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is
deactivated. The PAD Indicator light illuminates the passenger seat and for most properly installed child
restraint systems. However, under certain conditions,
words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” to show that the
even with a properly installed child restraint system, the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not inflate during
PAD Indicator Light may not be illuminated, even
a collision. When the right front passenger seat is empty
though the Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. This
or when very light objects are placed on the seat, the
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
can occur if the child restraint is lighter than the lightest 2. Remove any extra materials from the passenger seat,
such as cushions, pads, seat covers, seat massagers,
weight necessary to illuminate the PAD Indicator Light.
blankets, extra clothing, etc.
NEVER assume the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is
deactivated unless the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated
3. Place the seatback in the full upright position.
with the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF.”
4. Have the adult passenger sit upright in the passenger
If The Pad Indicator Light Is Illuminated For An
seat, sitting in the center of the seat cushion, with the
Adult Passenger:
passenger’s legs fully extended.
If an adult passenger is seated in the passenger seat and
the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated, the passenger 5. Restart the vehicle and have the passenger remain in
this sitting position for two to three minutes after
may be sitting improperly. Follow the steps below to
restarting the vehicle.
allow the OCS to detect the adult passenger’s seated
weight to activate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag:
1. Turn off the vehicle and have the adult passenger step
out of the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING!
• If the PAD Indicator Light remains illuminated for
an adult passenger, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. Failure to do
so may cause serious injury or death. If the PAD
Indicator Light is illuminated with the words
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not inflate in the event of
a collision.
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of a
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. A deploying
passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death
or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small
Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult,
occupies the passenger seat, the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag may be deactivated. Therefore, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may or may not deploy for
a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult (depending on size), who is seated in the front passenger
seat. This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly.
The driver and passenger must always pay attention to
the Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System. The PAD
Indicator Light tells you whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is activated or deactivated. If the
PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF,” the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag may not inflate in the event of a collision. If the
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” when an adult is in the front
passenger seat, the front passenger must reposition his/
her body in the seat until the PAD Indicator Light goes
out. This means that the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag is activated. Failure to be properly seated in the
passenger seat may prevent the passenger air bag from
deploying.
WARNING!
Occupants in the front passenger seat sitting improperly may deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag. This may result in serious injury or death in
a collision. Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with the seat back in an upright position, your
back against the seat back, sitting upright, facing
forward, in the center of the seat, with your feet
comfortably on or near the floor.
Do Not Decrease The Passenger’s Total Seated
Weight On The Passenger Seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so
may result in serious injury or death. The OCS determines the most probable classification of the occupant
that it detects. The OCS bladder will detect the front
passenger’s decreased seated weight, which may result
in deactivation of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
in a collision and serious injury or death may result. This
does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the
front passenger seat may result in deactivation of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
• The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instrument panel)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
• The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns passenger’s increased seated weight, which may result in
activation of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a
to face the rear of the vehicle
collision and serious injury or death may result. This
• The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright
does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
position
Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the
front passenger seat may result in activation of the
• Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag under certain condi• Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat
tions, for example:
and center console
• The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns
• Anything that may decrease the front passenger’s
to face the rear of the vehicle
seated weight
• The front passenger seatback is not in the full upright
Do Not Increase The Passenger’s Total Seated
position
Weight On The Passenger Seat
• The front passenger carries or holds an object while
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.)
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so
may result in serious injury or death. The OCS deter- • Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat
mines the most probable classification of the occupant
• Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat
that it detects. The OCS bladder will detect the front
and center console
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Accessories that may increase the seated weight on the
front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger
seat
• Anything that may increase the front passenger’s
seated weight
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
2
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
WARNING!
Placing an object on the floor under the front passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or death
(Continued)
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor
under the front passenger seat.
• Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not
come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first
placed in the on position, and stays on after you
start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have
an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
• If there is a fault present in the OCS, both the PAD
Indicator Light and the Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate to show that the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag is deactivated. Should this occur, the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will remain
deactivated until the fault is cleared. This indicates
that you should take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer for service immediately.
in the instrument panel
The Air Bag Warning Light
will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the
front passenger seat status will illuminate whenever
the OCS is unable to classify the front passenger seat
status or when there is a fault present in the OCS
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS com- • At no time should any supplemental restraint system
ponents that may affect Passenger Advanced Front Air
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener
be modified or replaced with any part except those
Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly classify a
which are approved by FCA US LLC.
front seat passenger, the OCS components must function
as designed.
If the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any
reason, take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
FCA US LLC approved seat accessories may be used.
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the
specific model being repaired. Always use the correct
seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
• Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
• Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related components,
seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the
air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
(Continued)
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(CMVSS).
Supplemental Door-Integrated Side Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental DoorIntegrated Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head injury to front
seat outboard occupants in certain side impacts. SABICs
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the may reduce the risk of injuries in certain side impacts, in
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu- addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the
pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front seat belts and body structure. The SABICs are located in
the door trim below the side windows. The trim covering
Air Bags.
the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Knee Impact Bolsters
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
inflate with enough force to injure you if you are not
belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in
the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Door-Integrated Side Air Bag Label
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain side impact events.
The SABICs deploy upward, covering the side windows.
An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the trim
out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
SABICs are designed to activate in certain side impacts.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) determines
whether the deployment of the SABIC in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the severity and
type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the SABIC on the
impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require
SABIC occupant protection. In side impacts, the SABICs
deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left
side SABIC only and a right-side impact deploys the
right side SABIC only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a
good indicator of whether or not SABICs should have
deployed.
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SABICs will not deploy in all side collisions, including their backs against the seats. Children must be properly
some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
that do not impact the area of the passenger compart- appropriate for the size of the child.
ment. SABICs may deploy during angled or offset frontal
collisions where the Advanced Front Air Bags deploy.
WARNING!
SABICs are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system.
SABICs deploy in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. Occupants, including children, who are up against
or very close to SABICs can be seriously injured or killed.
Occupants, including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the
side air bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child
restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
help keep you in position, away from an inflating SABIC.
To get the best protection from the SABICs, occupants
must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Door-Integrated Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). Do not stack luggage or
other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the SABICs. The door trim below the side
windows where the SABIC and its deployment
path are located, should remain free from any
obstructions.
• SABICs need room to inflate. Do not lean against
the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being too close to the SABICs during deployment
could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
• Relying on the SABICs alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The SABICs work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, SABICs won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have
SABICs.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious to you, but
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
they will open during air bag deployment.
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
If A Deployment Occurs
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
immediately after deployment.
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye NOTE:
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
but they will open during air bag deployment.
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in- • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
structions for cleaning.
authorized dealer immediately.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de- Enhanced Accident Response System
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air In the event of an impact, if the communication network
bags will not be in place to protect you.
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
WARNING!
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response SysDeployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot tem perform the following functions:
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition is placed in the “OFF” position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as or ON/RUN position. If the ignition is in the OFF
the battery has power or until the ignition is placed in position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not
on and the air bags will not inflate.
the “OFF” position.
• Unlock the doors automatically.
System Reset Procedure
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
functions after an event, the ignition must be changed
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
for a self-check when the ignition is first placed in the
Air Bag Warning Light
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malThe air bags must be ready to inflate for your function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
protection in a collision. The Occupant Re- Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
straint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated again after initial startup.
with air bag system electrical components.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfuncthe air bag system whenever the ignition is in the START tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in
the on position, and stays on after you start the
vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
crash investigation.
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
were buckled/fastened;
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
• How far (if at all) the driver was pushing the accelera- In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
tor and/or brake pedal; and,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
vehicle or the EDR.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
Child Restraints
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children.
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in proper
restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult seat belt. Always check the child seat
Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instrucbuckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash tions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.
the rear seats rather than in the front.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
WARNING!
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to NOTE:
hold even an infant on your lap could become so • For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
or call 1–866–SEATCHECK (732–8243). Canadian resihow strong you are. The child and others could be
dents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
additional information:
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
• www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/
safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large for
Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Children who are at least two years old
or who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are
too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their booster seat
Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
WARNING! (Continued)
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the seat belt
out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or
neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or
use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for additional information on ALR.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will • ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Can the head restraints be removed?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten
the seat belt against the belt path of the
child restraint?
Weight limit of the
Child Restraint
Installing A Child Restraint with A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Always use the tether anchor when using
the seat belt to install a forward facing
child restraint, up to the recommended
weight limit of the child restraint.
No
No
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
position. Move the vehicle seat as far rearward as
possible to keep the child as far from the advanced 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
passenger air bag as possible.
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web- Anchorage
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
WARNING!
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
There is a tether strap anchor located behind
the child tether access cover behind the passenger seat. To attach a child restraint tether strap
to the anchor:
2
1. Move the seat forward.
2. Move the seatback to its full forward position.
3. Remove the child tether access cover by prying either
side with a screwdriver or similar tool, as shown.
Child Seat Tether Access Cover
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Attach the tether hook to the anchor loop.
Child Seat Tether Anchor
NOTE: While the child tether is in use, keep the access
Tether Hook
cover in a safe place so that it can be replaced after use of 6. Move the seat to its farthest rearward position. Apply
the child tether.
body pressure to the seat to be sure the seat adjusters
have latched.
4. Pass the child restraint tether hook through either
opening in the seatback underneath the head restraint. 7. Return the seatback to an upright position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
8. Remove slack from the tether strap according to the BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
child restraint manufacturer’s directions.
A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain
(engine, transmission, and rear axle) in your new vehicle.
WARNING!
Following these few simple guidelines is all that is
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to necessary for a good break-in.
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
Transporting Pets
For the first 500 miles (800 km):
• Keep your vehicle speed below the legal, posted speed
limit and your engine speed below 4,000 RPM.
• Avoid driving at a constant speed, either fast or slow,
for long periods.
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
• Do not make any full throttle starts and avoid full
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
throttle acceleration.
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
• Use the proper gear for your speed range.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses • Wait until the engine has reached normal operating
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
temperature before driving at the recommended maximum break-in speed.
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Avoid excessive idling.
• Check the engine oil level at every fuel fill.
NOTE: A new engine will consume some oil during the
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as a sign of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
Exhaust Gas
AREA.
WARNING!
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
(Continued)
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
WARNING! (Continued)
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight
seconds for a bulb check when the ignition is first cycled
to ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of
your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal
area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that
they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other
ways.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
Defroster
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to Check the tires for proper pressure.
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
▫ Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
▫ Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
▫ Manual Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
▫ Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ Non-Adjustable Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . .99
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .100
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
▫ Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
3
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . .114
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .108
▫ To Deactivate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
▫ To Resume Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
▫ Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .120
䡵 TILT STEERING COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .121
䡵 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Adjustable Foot Rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .124
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .125 䡵 CUPHOLDERS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . .134
▫ Using HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .129 䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
▫ Auxiliary Jumper Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
3
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. This feature will be defaulted
on, and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in
reverse.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
If Equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and
a 9-1-1 button.
9-1-1 Call
Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call
system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the
Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the
touch screen.
Assist Calls
The ASSIST Button is used for contacting Roadside
Assistance, Vehicle Care and Uconnect® Care. The 9-1-1
Button connects you to emergency services to someone
who can help. Roadside Assistance will know what
vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional fees
may apply for roadside Assistance.
• Uconnect® Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for Uconnect® Access and Uconnect® Access Via
Mobile features.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
3
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger side mirror.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver-side
door trim panel.
Power Mirror Controls
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) to select the
mirror that you want to adjust.
NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Vanity Mirror
3
A vanity mirror is on the passenger side sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward.
Vanity Mirror
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SEATS
Manual Seats
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the Forward And Rearward Adjustment
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Seat Adjustment Bar
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat, near the floor.
Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the seat is in the desired
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and The seat height adjustment lever is located on the outrearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters board side of the seat. Pull upward on the lever to raise
have latched.
the seat height or push downward on the lever to lower
the seat height.
Seat Height Adjustment
Height Adjustment Lever
3
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Recliner Adjustment
seat to its full upright position, lean forward, pull the
recliner lever upward and hold it until the seat returns to
its full upright position.
WARNING!
Recline Lever
The recliner lever is located on the outboard side of the
seat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly, pull the
recliner lever upward, lean backward until the seat is in
the desired position, and release the lever. To return the
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
Power Seats
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Power Seat Switch
On models equipped with power seats, the power seat
switch is located on the outboard side of the seat near the
floor.
3
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward
Release the switch when the desired position has been
reached.
WARNING!
Power Seat Recliner Switch
The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward.
Push the power seat recliner switch forward or rearward,
the seatback will move in the direction of the switch.
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into
position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for passengers. An improperly
latched seatback could cause serious injury.
Non-Adjustable Head Restraints
The non-adjustable head restraints are form fitted into
the upper structure of the seatback and are designed to
reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in
the event of a rear impact. The seatback should be
properly adjusted to an upright position where the head
restraint is positioned as close as possible to the back of
your head.
3
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
1. Reach into the back side area of the drivers front
fender to gain access to the hood release lever.
2. Pull the hood release lever rearward to release the
hood latches.
Hood Release Lever
Hood Release Lever Location
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
3. Lift the hood upward to the full forward position.
Opened Hood
NOTE: The recommended lift point is to place the lifting
hand forward of one of the wiper arms and pull up. The
assist props will help raise and hold the hood to a normal
usage position.
CAUTION!
• Do not leave the hood open in areas where strong
gust of wind are likely. Such a place might be by
the side of the road where large trucks pass by.
Strong gusts of wind may damage the hood. Always close the hood in such situations.
• To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood
to close it. Simply lower the hood until it is open
approximately 18 in (46 cm) and then drop it. This
should secure both latches. If both latches did not
secure, a slight push effort in the same area used
for opening the hood (front of wiper arm) needs to
be applied to secure the latches. Never drive the
vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both
latches engaged.
3
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming and
interior lights.
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off
when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
this feature.
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the A NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
(AUTO) position. When the system is on, the headlight turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights “Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Feawill stay on for up to 90 seconds after placing the ignition tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
in the OFF position. To turn the Automatic system off, further information.
move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
Headlight Time Delay
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headThis feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
vehicle in an unlit area.
Automatic Headlights Only)
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
Automatic Headlights
3
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place Daytime Running Lights
the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the The LED Daytime Running Lights will come on whendelay.
ever the engine is running and the park brake is off. The
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime
driving.
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can
• The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System, refer
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrufeature.
ment Panel” for further information.
• The headlight delay time is programmable using the
Lights-On Reminder
Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
information.
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
NOTE:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
Multifunction Lever
Turn Signals
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
steering column.
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the Driver
Information Display (DID) and a continuous chime
will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile
(1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Multifunction Lever
3
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
High/Low Beam Switch
Interior Lights
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam. automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
Flash-To-Pass
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
open. This includes the glove box light and the trunk
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
light. To restore interior light operation, either place the
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light
released.
switch.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
Dimmer Controls
Interior Light Control
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is
located on the left side of the instrument panel. Rotating
the dimmer control upward with the parking lights or
headlights on will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights and ambient lighting.
Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Interior Lights
Dimmer Control
3
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF
position. The interior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, Driver Information Display (DID),
and radio when the position lights or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers
Intermittent Wiper System
and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
or ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause bethe left side of the steering column.
tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” position before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Mist Feature
When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from
a passing vehicle is needed, push the washer knob,
3
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to pushed while in the off position, the wiper will turn on
the first detent and release. The wipers will cycle one and cycle approximately three times after the wash knob
is released.
time and automatically shut off.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Windshield Washers
To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob,
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to
the second detent. Washer fluid will be sprayed and the
wiper will operate for two to three cycles after the washer
knob is released from this position.
If the washer knob is depressed while in the delay range,
the wiper will operate for several seconds after the
washer knob is released. It will then resume the intermittent interval previously selected. If the washer knob is
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
you and then move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. When the column is in the desired
position, push the release lever forward to lock the
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
column firmly in place.
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is
placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature
is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off
when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by
this feature.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
“Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
TILT STEERING COLUMN
The tilt release lever is located below the multifunction
lever on the left side of the steering column. To tilt the
column, simply pull the release lever rearward toward
Tilt Steering Column Lever
3
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
Adjustable Pedals Switch
seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator,
Push the switch forward to move the pedals forward
and clutch pedal to move toward or away from the driver
(toward the front of the vehicle).
to provide improved position with the steering wheel.
Push the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left side of
(toward the driver).
the steering column.
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control System is on. The following messages will be displayed in
the Driver Information Display (DID) if the pedals are
attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked
out (“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control
Engaged” or “Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In
Reverse”).
NOTE:
• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full
pedal travel.
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find
the best possible seat/pedal position.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustable Foot Rest
To adjust the pedal:
This feature allows the driver to adjust the foot rest 1. Adjust the seat and steering column to a comfortable
forward or backward and to rotate it upward or downposition.
ward to allow for greater driving comfort.
2. Using a socket wrench, loosen the nut on the pedal.
3. Slide the pedal either forward or backward and rotate
it upward or downward as desired.
4. Tighten the nut, being careful not to over tighten it.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Adjustable Foot Rest
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple speed control buttons are pushed at the
same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF
4 — CANCEL
2 — RES +
3 — SET -
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the Electronic Speed
Control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the Driver Information Display (DID) will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
the set speed or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle above 20 mph (32 km/h).
has reached the desired speed, push the SET (-) button
To Vary The Speed Setting
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
To Increase Speed
operate at the selected speed.
To Set A Desired Speed
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can inand on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button. crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “ UnderA soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
button, manually accelerating 10 mph (16 km/h) above
To Deactivate
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
The speed increment shown is dependent on the selected To Decrease Speed
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “ Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the selected
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
continue to increase until the button is released, then
U.S. Speed (mph)
the new set speed will be established.
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
the new set speed will be established.
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Metric Speed (km/h)
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will the shift lever/gear selector is put into REVERSE. The
continue to decrease until the button is released, then ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the vehicle
the new set speed will be established.
above the rear license plate. The image will be displayed
in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to
To Accelerate For Passing
“check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen.
Push the accelerator as you would normally. When the
After five seconds this note will disappear.
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
NOTE: The ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera has proNOTE: If the accelerated speed goes above 10 mph
grammable modes of operation that may be selected
(16 km/h) of the set speed, the Electronic Speed Control
through the Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect®
will deactivate.
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay
feature and it is turned ON, the rear camera image will be
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted
out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
⬙PARK⬙ or the vehicle’s ignition is placed to the OFF
position.
When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
When the Vehicle is shifted out of Reverse (with camera
each zone:
delay turned OFF) the rear camera mode is exited and the
last touchscreen appears again.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
projected backup path based on the steering wheel
position.
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView®.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
(Continued)
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
The HomeLink® buttons, located on the sunvisor, desig- Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
nate the three different HomeLink® channels. The Ensure your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
HomeLink® indicator is located above the center button. before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system.
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds, or until the red
indicator flashes.
HomeLink® Buttons Sunvisor
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
Training The Garage Door Opener
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door 1 — Door Opener
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to 2 — Training Button
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
program while you push and hold the hand-held step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
transmitter button.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indiseconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
cator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
activates, programming is complete.
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. ReNOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not actilease both buttons after the indicator light changes
vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
from slow to rapid.
complete the training.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is erase the channels.
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you would like
to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
light in view.
follow these steps:
3. Simultaneously push and hold both the HomeLink®
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
button you want to program and the hand-held trans2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
mitter button.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indinot release the button.
cator light. HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programand then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Resteps.
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
before 1995.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Rolling Code)
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
• To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
erase the channels.
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Non — Rolling Code)
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sigTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
follow these steps:
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, place time-out in the same manner.
the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do door or gate motor.
not release the button.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 NOTE:
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programprogram while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
light in view.
activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button,
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
while you press and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
erase the channels.
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take (Canadian/Gate Operator)
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
door may open and close while you are programming. follow these steps:
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
and observe the indicator light.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
not release the button.
erased.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink®
Troubleshooting Tips
To operate, push and release the programmed
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the
programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
also be used at any time.
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
Security
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety
information or assistance.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical speciThis device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
fications were met.
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
General Information
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
Your vehicle is equipped with two 12 Volt (13 Amp)
2. This device must accept any interference that may be power outlet that can be used to power cellular phones,
received including interference that may cause unde- small electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
sired operation.
One power outlet is located on the center console to the
right of the shifter. Push down on the power outlet to
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with access the opening. Push down on it again to close. This
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex- power outlet is powered when the ignition is in the ON
pressly approved by the party responsible for compli- or ACC position.
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
NOTE:
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Power Outlet
Center Console Outlet
The second power outlet is located between the seat NOTE: Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
backs above the cup holders. This power outlet is con- (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
nected directly by the battery and powered at all times. rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
WARNING!
CAUTION!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Auxiliary Jumper Harness
The SRT Viper is equipped with an auxiliary power
jumper, allowing an electronic device to be directly
connected to the vehicle without having to use the
console power outlets. Power to the device will be
controlled by the ignition switch.
NOTE: The electronic device must draw less than five
amps to prevent damage.
To install, remove the mirror cover by pulling straight
down and separating the cover pieces.
Mirror Cover Removal
Connect the auxiliary port jumper into the unused connector taped to the wiring bundle. Connect the other end
of the auxiliary port jumper to the electronic device.
NOTE: The red wire in the bundle is the power wire and
will provide the positive 12 volts to the electronic device.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
3
Auxiliary Port Jumper
Re-install the mirror cover and be sure to not pinch the
wires that go into the electronic device.
Mirror Cover Installation
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS — IF EQUIPPED
STORAGE
There are two cupholders located in the rear of the center Glove Compartment
console.
An electronic glove compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel. Push in the button to
open the glove compartment.
Center Console Cupholders
Glove Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Console Features
Console Cubby Bin — If Equipped
An open storage area, or cubby bin, is located in the
center console rearward of the shift lever.
Opened Glove Compartment
NOTE: The glove compartment will lock with the door
locks unless the key fob is detected inside the vehicle.
Center Console Cubby Bin Location
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Net Storage — If Equipped
Storage Bin — If Equipped
There is a cargo net storage area located between the There is a storage bin located between the driver and
driver and passengers seat.
passengers seat. Pull up on the release lever to open the
storage bin.
Cargo Net Storage Location
Storage Bin Location
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
Door Storage
The door panels contain storage areas located in the
lower center area of the door panel.
3
Door Panel Storage
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control panel. Push this button to turn
on the rear window defroster. An indicator in the button
will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, push the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .142
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .144
䡵 DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) . . . . .156
▫ DID Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
▫ Driver Information Display (DID) Messages . . .161
▫ DID Yellow Telltales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
▫ DID Red Telltales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ DID Green Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Driver Information Display (DID) Selectable
Menu Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
䡵 Uconnect® SETTINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ Buttons On the Faceplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Settings — Uconnect® 8.4 System Settings . . . .175
▫ SRT Performance Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
䡵 Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .193
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . .194
4
140 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . .194
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
䡵 RADIO ANTENNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .196
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC). . . . . . .197
▫ Summer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ Winter Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ Vacation/Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ Window Fogging and Frosting . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ Outside Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather
Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
䡵 Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
▫ Introducing Uconnect® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
▫ Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
▫ Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
▫ Climate (8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
▫ Navigation (8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
▫ Uconnect® Access* (8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
▫ Register (8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
▫ Yelp® (8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
▫ Mobile App (8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link™ (8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . .216
▫ Voice Texting (8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
4
142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Outlet
— Sound System Speaker
— Instrument Cluster
— Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Start/Stop Button
— Glove Compartment Lock
6 — Passenger Air Bag
7 — Glove Compartment
8 — Uconnect® System
9 — Uconnect® System Hard Controls
10 — Switch Bank (Screen Off, Hazard Switch,
Back Button)
11 — Climate Controls
12 — Dimmer Controls
13 — Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition is first cycled
to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
3. Seat Belt Reminder Light
check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains
unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate,
and the chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
4. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn
signal when the turn signal lever is operated.
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle
is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal
on, a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the
signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
for a defective outside light bulb.
Both turn signal arrows will flash in unison with the front
When the ignition is first cycled to ON/RUN, this and rear turn signals when the HAZARD WARNING
light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a button is operated.
bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s
seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145
NOTE: Leaving the hazard flashers on for extended NOTE:
periods will wear down the battery.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on
5. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
momentarily each time the ignition is cycled to
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
ON/RUN.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
• Each time the ignition is cycled to ON/RUN, the
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off
when the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN
previously.
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho- 6. Driver Information Display (DID) Menu Set (Selectrized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem able ICONS)
diagnosed and corrected.
The DID displays are located in the center portion of the
cluster and consists of eight section:
• Speedometer (Digital or Analog) (km/h or mph)
4
146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will
illuminate in gray under normal conditions, yellow
for non critical warning, red for critical warnings and
white for on demand information.
• Selectable Information (Compass, Temp, Range, to
Empty, Trip A, Trip B – if equipped, Average MPG)
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly
reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the
odometer must be reset at zero
• Menu Set (Selectable Icons)
• Reconfigurable Telltales
• Audio / Phone Information
• Menu Titles / Odometer
• Sub-menu Current Position — Whenever there are
• U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
sub-menus available, the position within the subvehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser
menus is here
the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven.
If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, Refer to Driver Information Display (DID) in this section
the repair technician should leave the odometer for further information.
reading the same as it was before the repair or
7. Brake Warning Light
service. If s/he cannot do so, then the odometer must
This light monitors various brake functions,
be set at zero, and a sticker must be placed in the
including brake fluid level and parking brake
door jamb stating what the mileage was before the
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
repair or service. It is a good idea for you to make a
record of the odometer reading before the repair/
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
anti-lock brake system reservoir.
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condiIf the light remains on when the parking brake has been tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the the brake fluid level checked.
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neceshydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
sary.
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
WARNING!
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac- a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
4
148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS 9. Oil Pressure Gauge Warning Light
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Oil Pressure Primary Gauge and Secondary gauge
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by Warning The Oil pressure Primary and Secondary gage
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the indicate the oil current pressure. When the oil pressure
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap- falls below a specific value (currently 10 psi), both of the
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off gauges will light up RED and flash for about 3 seconds.
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is This oil pressure indication may also occur when the
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light engine is first started. If the gauges turn RED while
inspected by an authorized dealer.
driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is as possible
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- 10. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
tion.
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxiNOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
8. Tachometer
This gauge measures engine revolutions-per-minute
(RPM x 1000).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
This indicator shows that the high beam headdetermine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
lights are on. Push the multifunction lever fortires).
ward to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull
toward yourself (normal position) to return to low beam. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
12. Fuel Gauge/Fuel Door Reminder
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
the ignition is in the ON/RUN position. The arrow in this Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumisymbol is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is located nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on the left side of the vehicle.
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
13. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
Equipped
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
Each tire, including the spare (if provided) the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
should be checked monthly when cold and Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
11. High Beam Indicator
4
150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacenot reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151
14. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
CAUTION! (Continued)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, that
monitors engine control systems. The light will
illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position,
before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when
cycling the ignition from OFF to ON/RUN, have the
condition checked promptly.
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
Certain conditions, such as poor fuel quality, may illuminate the MIL after engine start. The vehicle should be
serviced if the light stays on through several of your
typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will
drive normally and will not require towing.
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
(Continued)
4
WARNING!
152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
17. DID Amber Telltale Lights
15. Electronic Speed Control Indicator Lights
• Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following DID
This light will turn on when the electronic Amber Telltale Lights will display:
speed control is ON. Refer to “Electronic
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator — If
Speed Control” in “Understanding The
Equipped
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
This light will turn on to indicate the windinformation.
shield washer fluid is low.
• Electronic Speed Control SET Indicator
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET. Refer to “Electronic
• Low Fuel Light
Speed Control” in “Understanding The
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further inforgal (11.0 L), this light will turn on and remain
mation.
on until fuel is added.
16. Cruise Speed Set Value
Speed value shown when set.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
18. DID Red Telltale Lights
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following DID
Red Telltale Lights will display:
• Engine Temperature
This telltale warns of an overheated engine
condition. As temperatures rise and the gauge
approaches H, or 260°F, this telltale will illuminate, and a single chime will sound after reaching
a set threshold. Further overheating will cause the
temperature gauge to pass H, or 260°F. A continuous
chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool.
If the telltale turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it
off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not
return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and
call for service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for more information.
• Charging System
This telltale shows the status of the electrical
charging system. If the telltale stays on or
comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicles
non-essential electrical devices or increase engine
speed (if at idle). If the charging system telltale
remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing
a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE
IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
Refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do
In Emergencies” if jump starting is required.
• Oil Pressure Warning
This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure.
If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light
turns on.
4
154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not show how much oil is in
the engine. The engine oil level must be checked
under the hood.
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
This telltale informs you of a problem with
the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If the telltale comes on while driving,
have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
If a problem is detected, the telltale will come on
while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition when
the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever
is placed in the NEUTRAL position and the parking
brake applied. The telltale should turn off.
If the telltale remains lit with the engine running,
your vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see
an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If
the telltale is flashing when the engine is running,
immediate service is required. You may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or
engine stall and your vehicle may require towing.
• Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates high engine oil temperature. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as
soon as possible. A chime will sound for
four minutes when this light turns on.
• Door Ajar
This telltale turns on when one or more
doors are ajar. The telltale will show which
doors are ajar.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
19. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
20. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the park
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
lights or headlights are turned on.
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
is cycled to the ON/RUN position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
21. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it Light
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Conis not functioning and that service is required. However,
trol (ESC) is off.
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
4
156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)
This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful
information by pushing the switches mounted on the
steering wheel. The DID consists of the following:
• Tachometer
• MPH/KMH
• Vehicle Information
• Fuel Economy
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Audio
• Stored Messages
• Screen Setup
The Driver Information Display (DID) features a driver- • Performance
interactive display that is located in the instrument
• Diagnostics
cluster.
• Hibernation
Driver Information Display (DID)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
The system allows the driver to select information by • UP Arrow Button
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll
wheel:
upward through the main menu and submenus (Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Audio,
Stored Messages, Screen Set Up).
• DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and
submenus (Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Audio, Stored Messages, Screen Set Up).
• RIGHT Arrow Button
DID Steering Wheels Controls
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access/select the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. Push and
hold the RIGHT arrow button for two seconds
to reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.
4
158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• LEFT Arrow Button
DID Display
Push and release the LEFT arrow button to
return to the main menu from an info screen or
submenu item.
NOTE: Pushing the LEFT arrow button will override the
DID “pop up” messages and return you to the menu
screen.
DID Display
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
The DID display is located in the center portion of the 6. Suspension Status — The suspension status icon will
instrument cluster and consists of the following sections:
illuminate in this area. Refer to “Starting And Operating” for further information.
1. Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will
illuminate in grey under normal conditions, yellow for 7. ESC Status — The ESC status icon will illuminate in
non critical warnings, red for critical warnings, and
this area. Refer to “Starting And Operating” for further information.
white for on demand information.
2. Audio / Phone Information and Sub-menu Informa- 8. Launch Control status when launch control mode is
tion — Whenever there are sub-menus available, the
entered. Refer to “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
position within the sub-menus is shown here.
3. Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
4. Telltales/Indicators
5. Selectable Information (Tach, Mph/Kmh, Vehicle Info,
Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Audio, Stored Messages,
Screen Setup, Performance, Diagnostics, Hibernation)
4
160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warning or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
NOTE: Pushing the LEFT arrow button will override the
DID “pop up” messages and return you to the menu
screen.
• Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
• Five Second Stored Messages
of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle).
message takes control of the main display area for five
• Five Second Unstored Messages
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
condition that activated it remains active) and can be message takes control of the main display area for five
reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item. As long seconds and then returns to the previous screen. An
as there is a stored message, an “i” will be displayed in example of this message type is “Automatic High Beams
the DID’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this On.”
message type are “Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out”
and “Low Tire Pressure.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
Driver Information Display (DID) Messages
• Cruise Ready
• Front Seat Belts Unbuckled
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire Pressure Warnings
• Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled
• Service Tire Pressure System
• Key Fob Battery Low
• Parking Brake Engaged
• Service Air Bag System
• Brake Fluid Low
• ESC Status (ESC OFF, ESC ON, ESC SPORT, ESC •
TRACK, RAIN MODE) — Refer to “Starting And
•
Operating” for further information.
•
• Oil Pressure Low
•
• Fuel Low
•
• Service Antilock Brake System
•
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
•
• Cruise Off
Service Electronic Braking System
Engine Temperature Hot
Battery Voltage Low
Service Electronic Throttle Control
Lights On
Right Turn Signal Light Out
Left Turn Signal Light Out
4
162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Turn Signal On
DID Yellow Telltales
• Service Air Bag System
This area will show amber caution telltales. These telltales include:
• Service Air Bag Warning Light
• Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled
• Low Fuel Telltale
• Front Seat Belts Unbuckled
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
(11.0 L), this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
• Door Open
• Electronic Speed Control Ready
• Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled
• Doors Open
• Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is ON. Refer to “Electronic Speed
Control” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
DID Red Telltales
This area will show red telltales. These telltales include:
• Door Ajar
The oil level should be maintained in the ⬙SAFE⬙ zone at
all times. Oil level below the ⬙SAFE⬙ zone can cause the
oil pressure warning lamp to illuminate under some
conditions and can cause engine damage.
This light will turn on to indicate that one or • Charging System Light
more doors may be ajar.
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes on while
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut the charging system light remains on, it means that the
off the engine as soon as possible. The selectable gauge vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
will flash red for 3 seconds if the pressure is 10 psi or less. system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
The oil level should be checked under this condition.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. Refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine. Emergencies” if jump starting is required.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
4
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
• Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
light will come on when the ignition is first
cycled ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate, and a single
chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further
overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H,
the indicator will continuously flash, and a continuous
chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
engine is running. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
has completely stopped and the shift lever is in Neutral, stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
with the Parking Brake applied. The light should turn off. shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authoservice. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
required. You may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall, and your vehicle
may require towing.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
DID Green Telltales
Tachometer
• Electronic Speed Control SET
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
This telltale will illuminate green when the
button until the Tachometer icon is highlighted
electronic speed control is SET. Refer to “Elecin the DID. Push and release the RIGHT arrow
tronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The
button to change the display between full
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
tachometer or digital speedometer.
information.
MPH To km/h
Driver Information Display (DID) Selectable Menu
Items
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until
button until the MPH to km/h icon is highthe desired Selectable Menu icon is highlighted in the
lighted in the DID. Push and release the OK
DID.
button to change the display between MPH
or km/h.
4
166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• If one or more tires have low pressure, the tire pressure
values in each corner of the ICON with the pressure
value of the low tire displayed in a different color than
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
the other tire pressure value.
button until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted
in the DID. Push and release the RIGHT arrow • If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service
button to display the following information
Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
sub-menus:
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
Tire Pressure
reset. Push and release the LEFT arrow button to return
to the main menu.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the DID. Push and Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
release the RIGHT arrow button, and one of the follow- under “Starting and Operating” for further information.
ing will be displayed:
Coolant Temperature
• If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Coolant Temperature” is highlighted in the DID. Push
the ICON.
and release the RIGHT arrow button, and the coolant
temperature will be displayed.
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
Oil Temperature
Current Power
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Oil Temperature” is highlighted in the DID. Push and
release the RIGHT arrow button, and the oil temperature
will be displayed.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Current Power” is highlighted in the DID. Push and
release the RIGHT arrow button, and the current power
will be displayed.
Engine Hours
Current Torque
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Engine Hours” is highlighted in the DID. Push and
release the RIGHT arrow button, and the oil temperature
will be displayed.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Current Torque” is highlighted in the DID. Push and
release the RIGHT arrow button, and the current torque
will be displayed.
Intake Air Temp.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Intake Air Temp.” is highlighted in the DID. Push and
release the RIGHT arrow button, and the intake air
temperature will be displayed.
4
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the SRT icon is highlighted in the DID. Push and release
the RIGHT arrow button, and 0–60 MPH Duration will be
displayed. Push and release the LEFT and RIGHT arrow
button to scroll through the following information submenus:
SRT Performance
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Performance Features is intended for off-highway or offroad use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
0–60 Time
Push and release the LEFT and RIGHT arrow button
until the last 0–60 MPH information is displayed.
Braking Distance
Push and release the LEFT and RIGHT arrow button
until the last Braking Distance information is displayed.
1/4 Mile Elapsed Time
Push and release the LEFT and RIGHT arrow button
until the last 1/4 Mile Top Speed & Duration information
is displayed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
1/8 Mile Elapsed Time
Range To Empty (RTE)
Push and release the LEFT and RIGHT arrow button Average Fuel Economy/Miles Per Gallon (MPG Baruntil the last 1/8 Mile Top Speed & Duration information graph)
is displayed.
Current Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
G-Force Instant
Trip A
Push and release the LEFT and RIGHT arrow button
until the Current G-Forces are displayed.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
G-Force Peak
Push and release the LEFT and RIGHT arrow button
until the Peak G-Forces are displayed.
Fuel Economy
button until the Trip A icon is highlighted in
the DID. The Trip A information will display
the following:
• Distance
• Average Speed
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow • Elapsed Time
button until the Fuel Economy icon is highHold the RIGHT arrow button to reset all the informalighted and the following will display:
tion.
4
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip B — If Equipped
Push and release Up or Down arrow button
until the Trip B icon is highlighted in the DID.
The Trip B information will display the
following:
• Distance
Audio
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Audio display icon is highlighted in the DID. Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button to display the active source.
Stored Messages
• Average Speed
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Messages Menu item is highlighted in the DID. This feature shows the
Hold the RIGHT arrow button to reset all the informanumber of stored warning messages. Pushing
tion.
the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see what the
stored messages are.
• Elapsed Time
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
• Battery
Upper Left
• Coolant Temperature
• None
Upper Right
• Compass
• None
• Temperature
• Compass
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Temperature
• Average Fuel
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Current Fuel
• Average Fuel
• Trip A
• Current Fuel
• Trip B
• Trip A
• Elapsed Time
• Trip B
• Oil Pressure
• Elapsed Time
• Oil Temperature
• Oil Pressure
4
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Oil Temperature
• Battery
Tach. Peak Hold
When enabled, the Tach. Peak Hold function marks the
peak Revolutions Per Minute (RPM) on the tachometer
• Coolant Temperature
gauge for 3 seconds when the RPM is above 4000. Using
• RIGHT Arrow Button
the UP and DOWN arrow switches on the left side of the
steering wheel, select the gauges icon from the menu on
Restore To Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default
the left side of the cluster (highlighted red is the active
Settings)
menu item). Use the right arrow to enter the gauges setup
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to screen and the up down arrows to select Tach Peak from
confirm.
the menu of gauge options.
Digital Speed
• On
• Off
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
Diagnostic Codes
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Diagnostic Code icon is highlighted in the DID. Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button to display any present diagnostic
trouble codes along with a brief definition.
Vehicle Hibernation
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Hibernation icon is highlighted
Tach. Peak Hold
in the DID. Push and release the RIGHT arrow
Select up and down to toggle between “ON” and “OFF.”
button to activate the Vehicle Hibernation
Mode, which minimizes vehicle battery drain while the
vehicle is being stored.
4
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® SETTINGS
The Uconnect® system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel that allow you to
access and change the customer programmable features.
NOTE: Many features can vary by vehicle
Uconnect® 8.4AN Buttons On The Touchscreen And
Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Faceplate
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
Buttons On the Faceplate
system allows you to access programmable features that
may be equipped such as Display, Voice, Clock, Safety &
Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Engine Off
Options, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth®, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings, Clear Personal Data, and System Information.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect®
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through
menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
center of the control knob one or more times to select or
To adjust the setting of a programmable feature, press the
change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
desired setting option. Once in the desired setting option,
press and release the preferred setting until a check-mark
Buttons On The Touchscreen
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
been selected.
Uconnect® display.
Once the setting is complete, press the Back Arrow
Customer Programmable Features/Personal
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu
Settings — Uconnect® 8.4 System Settings
or press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of
Press the “SRT & Apps” button on the touchscreen, then the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen to display button on the right side of the screen will allow you to
the menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect® toggle up or down through the list of available settings.
4
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause
the radio to activate the “Display Brightness With HeadAfter pressing the Display button on the touchscreen the
lights OFF” control even though the headlights are on.
following settings will be available.
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
• Display Mode
Display
This feature will allow you to select one of the auto
display settings. To change Mode status, press and release the Auto or Manual button on the touchscreen.
Then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen, or
push the back button on the faceplate.
This feature will allow you to select the display brightness when the headlights are off. Adjust the brightness
with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen,
then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen, or
push the back button on the faceplate.
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
• Set Theme — If Equipped
This feature will allow you to select the display brightness when the headlights are on. Adjust the brightness
with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen,
then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen, or
push the back button on the faceplate.
This feature will allow you to choose a theme for the
display screen. The theme will change the background
color, highlight color, and button color of the display
screen.
• Set Language
This feature will allow you to select one of the languages
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Set
Language button on the touchscreen and then press the
desired language button on the touchscreen until a
check-mark appears next to the language, showing that
setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push
the back button on the faceplate.
the Touchscreen Beep button on the touchscreen until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push
the back button on the faceplate.
• Units
This feature will allow you to have the DID, odometer,
and navigation system (if equipped) changed between
US and Metric units of measure. Press US or Metric until
a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push
the back button on the faceplate.
When this feature is selected, the Controls Screen will
stay open for five seconds before the screen times out.
With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open
until it is manually closed. Press the Control Screen
Time-Out button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu, or push the back button
on the faceplate.
• Touchscreen Beep
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
• Control Screen Time-Out — If Equipped
This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
sound heard when a touchscreen button is pressed. Press will appear in the DID as the vehicle approaches a
4
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
designated turn within a programmed route. To turn on
or enable, press the Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu or push the back button on
the faceplate.
Voice
• Show Command List
When in this display, you may choose to Always, With
Help, or Never display the Teleprompter with possible
options while in a voice session. To change the Show
Command List settings, press the “Always,” “With
Help,” or “Never” button on the touchscreen until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
Clock
• Voice Response Length
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re- following settings will be available:
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, press the “Brief” or “Detailed” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
• Sync Time With GPS
This feature will allow you to automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press
the “Sync with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow return to the previous menu or press the “X” button on
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
• Time Format
• Set Time Hours
This feature will allow you to select the time format
This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the
with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen must be touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the 12hrs
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–” or 24hrs setting, showing that setting has been selected.
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to to the previous menu, or push the back button on the
return to the previous menu or press the” X” button on faceplate.
the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.
Clock
• Set Time Minutes
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the
This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The following settings will be available:
“Sync with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen must be • Sync Time With GPS
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or This feature will allow the radio to sync time with a GPS
down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to signal. To change the Sync Time setting, press the “Sync
4
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
time with GPS” button on the touchscreen until a check- • Time Format
mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has
This feature will allow you to select the time format
been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchdisplay setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the
screen to return to the previous menu.
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
• Set Time Hours
“12hrs” or “24hrs” setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync
to return to the previous menu.
time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–” • Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or
This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the
down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
return to the previous menu.
Status setting press the “Show Time in Status Bar” button
• Set Time Minutes
on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press
This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
“Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
previous menu.
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or
down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
Safety & Driving Assistance — If Equipped
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
the touchscreen the following settings will be available: system is active. To make your selection, press the “Hill
Start Assist” button on the touchscreen until a check• ParkView® Backup Camera Delay
mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera has been selected. Press the back arrow/Done button on
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
the previous screen appears again. When the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned ON), Lights
the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen the
displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of following settings will be available.
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
• Headlight Off Delay
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
“PARK” or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
To set the ParkView® Backup Camera Delay press the have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
“settings” button, then the “Safety & Driving Assistance” when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
button on the touchscreen. Press the “Parkview Backup Delay status, press the “+” or “-” button on the touchcamera Delay” button on the touchscreen to turn the screen to select your desired time interval. Press the back
ParkView® Delay ON or OFF.
4
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
• Daytime Running Lights
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status, whenever the vehicle is set in motion. To make your
press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select selection, press the Daytime Running Lights button on
your desired time interval. Press the back arrow button the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
push the back button on the faceplate.
previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
• Headlights With Wipers
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap- When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
your selection, press the Headlights With Wipers button selected. To make your selection, press the Flash Lights
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
with Lock button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu, or push the back button
on the faceplate.
• Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press the Auto Unlock On Exit
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
Doors & Locks
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchPress the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
screen the following settings will be available.
to the previous menu, or push the back button on the
• Auto Door Locks
faceplate.
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto Door
Locks” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu, or push the back button
on the faceplate.
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the Passive Entry
Feature. To make your selection, press the Flash Lights
With Lock button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
4
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob
to return to the previous menu, or push the back button Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
on the faceplate.
• Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the Key Fob Lock button is pressed. To make your
selection, push the Sound Horn With Remote Lock
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu, or push the back button on the
faceplate.
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter
which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the
driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press
Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed,
touching the handle more than once will only result in
the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected,
once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/
unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use
RKE transmitter).
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first • Passive Entry
press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
UNLOCK button. You must press the RKE transmitter
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate. Refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle”.
“Engine Off Power Delay” status, press the 0 seconds, 45
seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes button on the touchscreen. Then press the back arrow/Done button on the
touchscreen.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the “Headlight Off
Engine Off Options
Delay” status, press the ⬙Up⬙ or ⬙Down⬙ arrow button on
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the the touchscreen to select your desired time interval. Press
touchscreen the following settings will be available.
the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu.
• Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
4
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Audio
• Speed Adjusted Volume
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen the This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
following settings will be available.
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
press the “Off,” “1,” “2,” or “3” button on the touch• Balance/Fade
screen. Then press the arrow back button on the touchThis feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade screen.
settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows
• Surround Sound
to adjust, or tap the ‘C’ icon to readjust to the center.
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
• Equalizer
To make your selection, press the Surround Sound button
This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off” followed by
settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting pressing the arrow back button on the touchscreen.
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the • Loudness
touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To
touchscreen.
make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” The button will
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press highlight indicating that the setting has been selected.
Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen
directly on the desired setting.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
• AUX Volume Offset
• Paired Audio Sources
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
To make your selection, press the “AUX Volume Match”
button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3
followed by pressing the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
Phone/Bluetooth®
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
• Channel Skip
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth®” button on the
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
• Paired Phones
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
This feature shows which phones are paired to the your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip
to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
followed by pressing the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
4
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Subscription Information
Restore Settings
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
to access the Subscription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
• Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the
Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking
⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?”
select “Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the
settings are restored, a pop up appears stating ⬙settings
reset to default.⬙ Press the okay button on the touchscreen
to exit.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
Clear Personal Data
System Information
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button After pressing the “System Information” button on the
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail- touchscreen the following settings will be available:
able:
• System Information
• Clear Personal Data
When System Information is selected, a System InformaWhen this feature is selected it will remove personal data tion screen will appear displaying the system software
including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To remove version.
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”
SRT Performance Pages
button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure
you want to clear all personal data?” select “OK” to To access the SRT Performance Pages, press the “SRT &
Clear, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data has been cleared, Apps” button on the touchscreen then select the “SRT
Performance Pages” App from the list. Press the UP or
a pop up appears stating ⬙Personal data cleared.”
DOWN buttons on the touchscreen to cycle through the
list.
4
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the SRT Performance Pages is intended for off-highway or offroad use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the Performance Pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
• Gauges 1
• Gauges 2
• Engine
• Options
The following describes each feature and its operation:
Timers
When the Timers Page is selected you will be able to
select from following “Tickets”:
• Current
The SRT Performance Pages include the following:
Pressing the “Current” button displays a “real time”
summary of performance timers.
• Home
• Last
• Timers
Pressing the “Last” button displays the last recorded run
of performance timers.
• G-Force
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
• Best
The “Tickets” contain the timers listed below:
Pressing the “Best” button displays the best recorded run • 0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h)
of performance timers, except for braking data.
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to
60 mph (0 to 100 km/h).
• Save
Pressing the “Save” button will let you save the last run. • ⅛ Mile (200 meter)
Any saved run over 10, will overwrite the last saved run Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ⅛ Mile
for Uconnect® System storage. The operation of the Save (200 meters).
feature is listed below:
• ¼ mile (400 meter)
• With a USB jump drive installed, press the “USB”
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ¼ mile
button to save runs to the jump drive.
(400 meters).
• With an SD Card installed, press the “SD Card” to save
• Brake Distance
runs to the SD Card.
• Press the “Uconnect” button to save the runs to the Displays the distance it takes the vehicle to make a full
stop. Contains current and last data for distance and start
Owner web page.
– from speed.
• Press the “Cancel” button to view the last timer
“Ticket.”
4
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The distance measurement will be aborted if the Gauges 1
brake pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a When selected, this screen displays the following values:
complete stop.
• Oil Temperature
• Brake Speed
Displays the actual oil temperature.
Displays the speed the vehicle is traveling when the
• Oil Pressure
brake pedal is depressed.
NOTE: Brake Distance and Speed timers will only dis- Displays the actual oil pressure.
play ⬙ready⬙ when vehicle is traveling at greater than 30 • Battery Voltage
MPH (48 km/h).
Displays the actual battery voltage.
G-Force
Gauges 2
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force When selected, this screen displays the following values:
values (two lateral and two longitudinal) as well as • Coolant Temperature
steering angle.
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
When a G-Force greater than zero is measured, the
• Oil Temperature
display will update the value real-time. As the G-Force
Displays the actual oil temperature.
falls, the peak forces will continue to display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
• Intake Air Temperature
• Torque (ft-lb)
Displays the actual intake air temperature.
Displays the actual torque.
• Oil Pressure
• Oil Pressure (psi)
Displays the actual oil pressure.
Displays the actual oil pressure.
• Battery Voltage
Options
Displays the actual battery voltage.
When selected, this screen allows you to set your SRT
home page picture, and configure the vehicle color.
Engine
When selected, this screen displays the following values: Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
For detailed information about your Uconnect® radio,
• Speed (mph)
refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
Displays the actual speed.
• Horsepower (hp)
Displays the actual horsepower.
4
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
Located at the rear area of the center console, this feature
allows an iPod® or external USB device to be plugged
into the USB port.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
SD Card Slot, AUX Jack, And USB Port
1 — SD Card Slot
2 — AUX Jack
3 — USB Port
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
The button located in the center of the right hand control
will switch modes to Radio or other valid audio source.
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
Pushing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left hand control
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have
push-button in the center. Pushing the top of the switch
programmed in the radio pre-set buttons.
will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume.
RADIO ANTENNA
The am/fm radio antenna is located in the windshield.
4
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The Satellite/Navigation antenna is located in the rear General Information
liftgate, while the cellular phone antenna is on the This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
windshield behind the interior rearview mirror.
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in • Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is • This device may not cause harmful interference.
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the • This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opantenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
eration.
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
instrument panel below the radio.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect® system touchscreen.
Uconnect® touchscreen.
Buttons On The Faceplate
4
Uconnect® Temperature Controls
Automatic Climate Controls
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On The 4. AUTO Temperature Control
Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen)
Controls airflow temperature, distribution, volume, and
1. MAX A/C Button
the amount of air recirculation automatically. Press and
Press and release to change the current setting, the release to select. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing more information. Performing this function will cause
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator modes.
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
5. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Press and release to change the current setting, the Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feaindicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this ture is ON. Performing this function will cause the ATC
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch to switch into manual mode. The blower speed may
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off. increase when Defrost mode is selected. If the front
defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return
3. Recirculation Button
the previous setting.
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
6. Rear Defrost Button
CAUTION! (Continued)
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
7. Blower Control
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either the buttons on the
faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen as follows:
Button On The Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the control
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the knob counterclockwise.
4
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Button On The Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
8. Modes
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located
below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount
of airflow from these outlets.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort condemist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
as follows:
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Panel Mode
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
panel. Each of these outlets can be individuamount of air is directed through the defrost
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air
and side window demister outlets.
vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
• Mix Mode
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pasAir comes from the floor, defrost and side
senger temperature control buttons. Once the desired
window demist outlets. This mode works best
temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and
in cold or snowy conditions.
automatically maintain that comfort level.
9. Climate Control OFF Button
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
not necessary to change the settings. You will experiON/OFF.
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
10. Temperature Control Down Button
system to function automatically.
Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE:
11. Temperature Control Up Button
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO • The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Temperaunits by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
ture Control (ATC) Panel.
4
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
feature. Refer to the “Customer Programmable Fea- NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
tures — Uconnect® System Settings” in this section of lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window
the manual.
clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled autoTo provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
matically if these modes are selected.
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will Summer Operation
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
Recirculation Control
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corroWhen outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humid- sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
ity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
recirculate interior air by pressing the RECIRCULATION Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
control button. Recirculation mode should only be used Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
temporarily. The recirculation LED will illuminate on the Winter Operation
blower control knob when this button is selected. Push
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perforthe button a second time to turn off the Recirculation
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is functionmode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle.
ing properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode NOTE: Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will auduring Winter months is not recommended because it tomatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce
or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
may cause window fogging.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Vacation/Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service Outside Air Intake
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in
fresh air with the blower setting in high. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging and Frosting
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in
mild, rainy and/or humid weather. Windows may frost
on the inside of the glass in very cold weather. To clear
the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase
the front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation
mode without A/C for long periods, as fogging may
occur.
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, can cause
odor, and if they enter the plenum they could plug the
water drains. In winter months, ensure the air intake is
clear of ice, slush and snow.
4
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect®
Start using Uconnect® Voice Recognition with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands
and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect®
8.4AN system.
4
Uconnect® 8.4AN
If you see the
icon on your touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect® 8.4AN system.
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Get Started
Two buttons are all you need to control your Uconnect®
system with your voice.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing in- Basic Voice Commands
structions.
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger con- point while using your Uconnect® system.
versations are examples of noise that may impact Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
recognition.
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned • Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchthe beep, then say your Voice Command.
screen.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you
with a list of commands.
4
Uconnect® 8.4AN
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
. After the beep, say:
Push the VR button
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
Uconnect® 8.4AN Radio
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your iPod® or USB device. Your Voice
Uconnect® offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth®
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
song and genre information is displayed.
available for connected USB and iPod® devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Media
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth®
• Change source to iPod®
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
Uconnect® 8.4AN Media
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect®. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work.”
4
. After the beep, say one of
Push the Phone button
the following commands:
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
Uconnect® 8.4AN Phone
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect® will announce incoming text messages. Push
and say Listen. (Must have comthe Phone button
patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect® system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
. After the beep, say: “Reply.”
the Phone button
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
I’ll call you
I need
See you in
later.
directions.
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost.
Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementa2. Listen to the Uconnect® prompts. After the beep, tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advanrepeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the tage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
system prompts.
UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone® iOS6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Climate (8.4AN)
Yes.
Stuck in Traffic.
See you later.
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures handsStart without
No.
I’ll be Late.
free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep
me.
moving ahead.
Okay.
Where are you?
I will be
<number> minAre you there
Call me.
utes late.
yet?
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the Navigation (8.4AN)
following commands:
The Uconnect® navigation feature helps you save time
• Set temperature to 70 degrees
and become more productive when you know exactly
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to how to get to where you want to go.
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle.
. After
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
the beep, say:
• For the 8.4AN Uconnect® System, say: “Navigate to
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
Uconnect® 8.4AN Climate
4
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
After the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
.
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect® Access,
press the SRT & Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen
to get started. Detailed registration instructions can be
found on the next page.
*Uconnect® Access is available only on equipped vehicles purchased within the continental United States and
Alaska. Services can only be used where coverage is
available; see coverage map for details.
9-1-1 Call
Theft Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Uconnect® 8.4AN Navigation
Remote Vehicle Start**
Uconnect® Access* (8.4AN)
Remote Horn and Lights
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the Uconnect® Access services in the next
Yelp® Search
Voice Texting
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
Roadside Assistance Call
Wi-Fi Hotspot***
**If vehicle is equipped.
5. Click on the link inside the email within 72 hours and
complete the easy online registration process to create
a personal Mopar® Owner Connect account linked to
your vehicle.
***Extra charges apply.
Register (8.4AN)
4
1. Press the SRT & Apps button on the bottom of the
8.4-inch touchscreen.
2. If a pop-up message appears, press Register or go to
the Favorite Apps menu and press Uconnect® Registration.
3. Read through the registration instructions. Enter and
confirm your personal email address. Then press
Send.
4. Check your personal inbox for an email from
Uconnect® Access.
Uconnect® Registration 8.4AN
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Download the Uconnect® Access App to a compatible
Securely link your mobile device to your vehicle with the Apple® or Android® mobile devices. All you need to do
Uconnect® Access App. Once you have downloaded the is:
App, you may start your vehicle or lock it from virtually 1. After registering with Uconnect® Access, log on to
any distance. (Vehicle must be properly equipped with
your Mopar® Owner Connect account at
factory-installed Remote Start.)
moparownerconnect.com.
Mobile App (8.4AN)
2. On the Dashboard page, enter your mobile phone
number to receive a link to download the App on your
mobile device. Or go to iTunes®, or Google Play, and
search for the Uconnect® Access App.
3. To activate the App, enter your Mopar Owner Connect
user name and password and log in. Your vehicle is
then connected to your mobile device.
Voice Texting (8.4AN)
Mobile App
1. To send a message, push the Phone button
. After
the beep, say the following command: “Send message to John Smith.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the Yelp® (8.4AN)
message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect® Once registered with Uconnect® Access, you can use
to process your message.
your voice to search for the most popular places or things
3. The Uconnect® system will repeat your message and around you.
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or 1. Press the “SRT & Apps” button on the touchscreen.
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect®
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy 2. Press the “All Apps” button on the touchscreen.
with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
3. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.
You must be registered with Uconnect® Access and have
4. Once the YELP® home screen appears on the toucha compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your
, then say: “YELP
screen, push the VR button
voice to send a personalized text message.
search.”
TIP:
5. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Uconnect® the place or business that you’d like
• Not compatible with iPhone®.
Uconnect® to find.
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
illuminated to use the feature.
4
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the SiriusXM Travel Link™ (8.4AN)
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,
Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?
SiriusXM Travel Link™ is a suite of services that brings a
wealth of information right to your Uconnect® 8.4AN
system.
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
Yelp®
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,
Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered
trademarks of Yelp.
Uconnect® System Support:
• U.S. residents call 1-877-855-8400 or visit
DriveUconnect.com
• Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca
Mon. – Fri., 7:00 am – 12:00 am, ET
SiriusXM Travel Link™
Additional Information
Sat., 8:00 am – 10:00 pm, ET
Sun., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
© 2014 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and Uconnect® Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241.
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner Please have your Uconnect® Security PIN ready when
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a you call.
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .232
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
▫ Shifting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
▫ Recommended Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
▫ Skip Shift Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
䡵 STREET/RACE MODE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .229 䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
䡵 LAUNCH MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
5
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Brake Pad Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .261
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .241
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
▫ Electronic Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .251
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .252
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .254 䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .270
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .258 䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .270
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .271
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
▫ Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
▫ 8.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release. . . . . . . . .284
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .279
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 䡵 GROUND CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
5
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct any other occupant to buckle their seat
belt.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the Key Fob in
or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Long periods of engine idling, especially at higher
than normal engine idle speeds, can cause excessive
exhaust temperatures, which can damage your vehicle. Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the
engine running.
Normal Starting
CAUTION!
The engine in your vehicle is designed for operation
down to 0°F (-18°C). Starting the engine below 0°F
(-18°C) coolant temperature creates a potential for
scuffing or seizing of internal components in this
high performance engine. To prevent engine damage,
do not start the engine at temperatures below 0°F
(-18°C).
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
NOTE: The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal
is pressed to the floor.
• You must disarm the security system in order to start
the engine. Refer to “Security Alarm System” in 3. Place the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for 4. Press the red ENGINE START/STOP button located
on the instrument panel. Release the button when the
further information.
engine starts.
• Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
However, if the engine has not started within three
seconds, slightly press the accelerator pedal while
continuing to crank. If the engine fails to start within
15 seconds, wait five seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
NOTE:
To Start The Engine:
1. Fully apply the parking brake.
2. Press the clutch pedal to the floor.
Engine START/STOP Button
5
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
(Continued)
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started, ignite
and damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may
be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or
the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can
be dangerous if done improperly, so follow this
procedure carefully. Refer to “Jump Starting” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
If the engine is flooded, it may start to run, but not have
enough power to continue running when the ENGINE
START button is released. If this occurs, continue cranking up to 15 seconds with the accelerator pedal pushed
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
all the way to the floor. Release the accelerator pedal and floor during each shift. As you release the clutch pedal,
the ENGINE START button once the engine is running lightly press the accelerator pedal.
smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, the “Normal Starting” procedure should
be repeated.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
NOTE: The parking brake should be engaged and the
shift lever placed into REVERSE before leaving the
vehicle, especially when parked on an incline.
Your vehicle is equipped with a high torque capacity dual
disc clutch. The clutch pedal must be fully pressed to the
CAUTION!
• Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch
pedal, or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause
abnormal wear on the clutch.
• Failure to press the clutch pedal fully to the floor
may cause increased shift efforts, and may result in
damage to the clutch and transmission.
• Do not rest your hand on the shift lever while
driving, as this may result in transmission damage.
• Do not attempt to shift the transmission if the rear
wheels are spinning due to loss of traction. Damage to the transmission may occur.
5
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
Ensure the transmission is in first gear when moving spring helps you know which gear you are in when you
forward from a standing position.
are shifting. Be careful when shifting from first to second
or downshifting from sixth to fifth.
CAUTION!
Failure to start out in first gear when moving forward
from a starting position may result in damage to the
clutch.
Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal and lift your foot off the
accelerator pedal before shifting gears. As you release the
clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal. Damage
to the transmission or clutch may occur if you do not
fully press the clutch pedal and lift off of the accelerator
pedal when shifting.
The spring will try to pull the shift lever toward third and
fourth gear. Make sure you move the shift lever into
second or fifth gear. If you let the shift lever move in the
direction of the pulling, you may end shifting from first
to fourth or from sixth to third gear.
You will find it easier to use only the lower gears for most
city driving. For steady highway driving with light
accelerations, sixth gear is recommended.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or
try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal
partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear on the
clutch.
The six-speed manual transmission has a spring that Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a
centers the shift lever near third and fourth gear. This complete stop.
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
NOTE:
(clutch pedal released), but it may also be heard when
driving. The noise may also be more noticeable when
the transmission is warm. This noise is normal and is
not an indication of a problem with your clutch or
transmission.
• Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission reverse
inhibitor system. When vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h), the reverse inhibitor activates to help
prevent shifts into REVERSE. When at a complete stop,
you may notice light shift efforts into REVERSE with • You must always use first gear (or Reverse) when
starting from a standing position.
the ignition in the ON position, and increased shift
efforts into REVERSE with the ignition in the OFF
position. This is normal operation of the transmission
CAUTION!
reverse inhibitor system.
Always make sure the vehicle comes to a complete
• Shifting gears during cold weather may require an stop before shifting into REVERSE. Failure to do so
increased effort until the transmission lubricant is may result in transmission damage.
warm. This is normal and not harmful to the transmisRecommended Shift Speeds
sion.
• Due to the high performance nature of your drivetrain, To use your manual transmission for fuel economy it
a certain amount of noise from the transmission is should be upshifted as listed below. Shift at the vehicle
normal. This noise can be most noticeable when the speeds listed for acceleration. Earlier upshifts during
vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged
5
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
cruise conditions (relatively steady speeds) will result in coolant is higher than 107°F (42°C), and vehicle speed is
increased fuel economy, and may be used as indicated. greater than 16 mph (26 km/h) but less than 18 mph
(29 km/h), and engine speed is less than 1,550 RPM, and
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
the transmission is in first gear, and the accelerator is at
20% throttle or less. The “Skip Shift Indicator Light”
RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS
located in the tachometer will illuminate during these
1-4
4-5
5-6
times.
mph
17
45
50
When the “Skip Shift Indicator Light” illuminates, the
(km/h)
(27)
(72)
(80)
shift mechanism will only allow shifts from first gear to
Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired fourth gear. After you shift the transmission into fourth
acceleration rate.
gear, you can press the clutch in and shift to another
forward gear.
Skip Shift Indicator Light
Downshifting - Proper downshifting will improve fuel
There are times when you must shift the trans- economy and prolong engine life.
mission directly from first gear into fourth gear To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, downinstead of from first gear into second gear. This shift to maintain a safe speed when descending a steep
is to help you get the best possible fuel grade.
economy from your vehicle. This occurs when engine
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
CAUTION!
If you skip more than one gear while downshifting
or downshift at too high a vehicle speed, you could
damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.
WARNING!
Skipping more than one gear while downshifting,
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. You
could have a collision.
the system will automatically shift the suspension dampers to the firmer Race damping setting during some hard
acceleration and braking situations. There are two modes
of operation:
• Street Mode — This mode will give a sporty, but
comfortable ride. This mode is driver selectable when
the vehicle is placed in STREET mode (press the
“STREET” button on the Instrument Panel). This mode
is intended for a smoother ride on the various types of
pavement and road conditions while still providing
damping levels appropriate extreme capabilities.
• Race Mode — This mode is driver selectable when the
vehicle is placed in RACE mode (press the “RACE”
This vehicle is equipped with a two mode electronic
button on the Instrument Panel). This mode is for track
controlled damping system. This system allows for a
use only and will supply maximum grip to the tires.
compliant street suspension damping setting or a firmer
race suspension damping setting. When in street mode
STREET/RACE MODE — IF EQUIPPED
5
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
LAUNCH MODE
• With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the sus- This system maximizes acceleration traction for straight
pension damping system will be in the last mode the line racing.
system was in when the vehicle was turned off. The 1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop on a level track
driver can select either Street or Race damping mode
surface with the engine running.
at any time.
2. Set the steering wheel for straight ahead driving.
• The suspension mode will lock and stay in whatever
the driver selects even when the ignition is turned off 3. Fully depress the clutch and select the first gear
position.
and the car restarted.
• The RACE setting will provide a much firmer ride.
• When RACE mode is enabled, a Shock symbol with
“RACE” next to it will light up in the instrument
cluster.
4. Press and release the “LAUNCH” Button (Located on
the steering wheel controls).
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
NOTE: If the cluster launch DID message indicates all
conditions are correct for launch and the throttle is
pressed to the floor quickly (within approximately 1/2
second) the system will hold the engine speed to a preset
speed (below the engine rev limiter speed).
6. Release the clutch aggressively. Do not ride the clutch.
Release the accelerator pedal to deactivate launch control. Pressing the launch control button or actuating the
brakes will also deactivate launch control.
NOTE:
LAUNCH Button
5. Rapidly press the accelerator pedal to the floor within
one second.
• Launch Mode brings the engine to optimum launch
RPM and waits for the driver to release the clutch.
Launch Mode then uses engine throttle only to achieve
controlled wheelslip for maximum acceleration
through first gear.
• Launch Mode can be used in any of the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) Modes.
5
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Launch mode should not be used within the first 500 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
miles of engine break-in.
Acceleration
WARNING!
Launch Mode is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be used on any public
roadways. It is recommended that this feature be
used in a controlled environment, and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly
have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully
whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,
snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are DRIVING THROUGH WATER
slushy.
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Driving your vehicle through deep puddles at speeds
over 5 mph (8 km/h), may cause water to be ingested
into the engine. This can cause severe engine damage.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
5
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
5
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici- If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho- level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
rized dealer.
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING!
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure you fully apply
the parking brake and shift the transmission into
REVERSE. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
As an added precaution when parking the vehicle, turn
the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
To apply the parking brake, grasp the handle and pull it
rearward until you feel resistance. To release the parking
brake, grasp the handle and pull it slightly while pressing
the button on the end of the handle. When the button
Parking Brake Lever
drops into the handle (releasing the lock), guide the
The parking brake should always be applied when the handle downward to its stop and then release the button
driver is not in the vehicle.
and the handle.
5
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
The “Brake System Warning Light” in the instrument
cluster will turn on when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position and the parking brake is applied.
NOTE:
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied
or a brake/ABS system fault. It does not show the
degree of brake application. If the “Brake System
Warning Light” is illuminated when the parking brake
is not applied please see your authorized dealer.
• Each time the parking brake is applied, the instrument
cluster will automatically go to the highest illumination setting regardless of the dimmer control setting.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
injured seriously or fatally. Do not leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible
to children), and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Ensure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving. Failure to do so can lead to brake
failure, and an accident.
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will
be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You may
notice increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the “Brake System Warning Light.”
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
Brake Pad Break-In
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a high performance braking system. The brake pads are a semimetallic compound, which offer superior fade resistance
for consistent operation. A compromise to using this type
of brake pad is that the brakes may squeal slightly under
certain weather and operating conditions (.i.e., during
light brake applications).
The brakes on your new vehicle do not require a long
break-in period. However, you should avoid repeated
hard brake applications from high speeds during initial
break-in. In addition, you should avoid severe brake
loading, such as may be encountered when descending
long mountain grades.
5
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
Safe Operating Tips
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
To use your brakes and accelerator more safely,
follow these tips:
• Do not “ride” the brakes by resting your foot on the
pedal. This could overheat the brakes and result in
unpredictable braking action, longer stopping distances, or brake damage.
• When descending mountains or hills, repeated
braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking
control. Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission whenever possible.
(Continued)
• Do not drive too fast for road conditions, especially
when roads are wet or slushy. A wedge of water can
build up between the tire tread and the road. This
hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction,
braking ability, and control.
• After going through deep water or a car wash,
brakes may become wet, resulting in decreased
performance and unpredictable braking action.
Dry the brakes by gentle, intermittent pedal action
while driving at very slow speeds.
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
The ABS conducts a low-speed self-test at approximately
12 mph (20 km/h). If you have your foot lightly on the
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake pedal while this test is occurring, you may feel a
brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake
slight pedal movement. The movement can be more
System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), and Elecapparent on ice and snow and be considered normal.
tronic Stability Control (ESC). All of these systems work
together to enhance vehicle stability and control in vari- The ABS pump motor runs during the self-test at 12 mph
(20 km/h) and during an ABS stop. The pump motor
ous driving conditions.
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
Anti-Lock Brake System
normal.
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the
driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse
CAUTION!
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent The Anti-Lock Brake System is subject to possible
wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery detrimental effects of electronic interference caused
by improperly installed aftermarket radios or telesurfaces.
phones.
NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard. This
is normal, indicating that the ABS is functioning.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
5
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting
equipment. This interference can cause possible
loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of
the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner, that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
(Continued)
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type as the original equipment and the tires must be
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the speeds, it may indicate a system malfunction or that the
system is inoperative. In this case, the system reverts to
computer.
standard non-anti-lock brakes. If this occurs, safely bring
the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible and
WARNING!
cycle the ignition to attempt to reset the ABS. If the light
Significant over or underinflation of tires, or mixing remains on, see your authorized dealer immediately to
sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss have the system serviced. Also, if the “BRAKE Warning
of braking effectiveness.
Light” and the “ABS Warning Light” are on, and the
parking brake is fully released, see your authorized
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
dealer immediately.
The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn
on and stay on briefly as a bulb check when the
ignition is first turned on. If the light does not
turn on during starting, have it repaired
promptly.
This light also illuminates at vehicle start-up to indicate
that the ABS self-check is in process. If the light remains
on after start-up, or turns on and remains on at road
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS system monitors the amount of wheel spin of
each driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability.
5
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Stability Control
In full on mode the TCS system enhances directional
control and stability of the vehicle under various driving
conditions. The ESC corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine power may also be reduced to assist
in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer
and help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
In full on mode ESC utilizes sensors in the vehicle to
determine the path that the driver intends to steer the
vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the intended path,
the ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to
assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or
understeer.
• Oversteer – when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer – when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control System (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on
the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
all accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces,
or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Operating
Modes
The ESC system may have five available operating
modes:
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC system.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in
this mode. The ESC On mode should be used for most
driving situations. The ESC should only be turned OFF
for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
ESC Full Off
ESC Button
The ESC Off mode is intended for off-highway or offroad use only and should not be used on any public
roadways. In this mode, all TCS and ESC stability features are turned OFF. To enter the “Full Off” mode, press
and hold the “ESC Off” switch for five seconds while the
vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After five
seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the
5
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
⬙ESC OFF⬙ message will display in the vehicle cluster (left
of the odometer). The “ESC OFF” message may appear in
the Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Driver
Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. To turn ESC
ON again, momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch.
WARNING!
With the ESC switched OFF, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability. The “Full
Off” ESC mode is intended for off-highway or offroad only.
Sport Mode — If Equipped
the “ESC” switch once (located on the steering wheel).
The “ESC Sport Light” will illuminate, and the ⬙ESC
SPORT⬙ message will display in the vehicle cluster (left of
the odometer). Refer to “Driver Information Display
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Track Mode — If Equipped
Track Mode has no traction control and has reduced
stability control. To enter the “Track Mode” mode, press
the “ESC” switch twice. The “ESC Track Light” will
illuminate, and the ⬙ESC TRACK⬙ message will display in
the vehicle cluster (left of the odometer). Refer to “Driver
Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Rain Mode
Sport mode has reduced traction control and reduced Rain mode offers increased traction control and stability
stability control. To enter the “Sport Mode” mode, press control for low traction conditions such as wet roads, dry
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
roads during cold temperatures, or when the driver TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
wants enhanced stability due to lack of familiarity or
Tire Markings
experience with the vehicle’s response. To enter the “Rain
Mode” mode, press the “ESC” switch three times. The
“ESC Rain Light” will illuminate, and the ⬙ESC RAIN⬙
message will display in the vehicle cluster (left of the
odometer). Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
NOTE: Some models may not offer “Sport” or “Track”
Mode.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
5
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designaT145/80D18 103M.
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
NOTE:
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
5
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
5
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
Term
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
Tire And Loading Information Placard
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
5
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
5.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
650 lbs [295 kg]).
Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
NOTE:
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The followpassengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pasvehicle with varying seating configurations and numsengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will • For the following example, the combined weight of
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
(392 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
5
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability need for earlier tire replacement.
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
NOTE:
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause ride.
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Tire Inflation Pressures
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
vehicle to drift left or right.
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
5
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
At least once a month:
mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidepocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
wall.
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under- Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
inflated.
temperature changes.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
CAUTION!
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, althe winter.
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
which could damage the valve stem.
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure outside temperature condition.
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle Radial Ply Tires
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
WARNING!
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operatCombining radial ply tires with other types of tires
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
5
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Repair
Tire Types
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it All Season Tires — If Equipped
meets the following criteria:
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary be• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm). failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold
driving conditions. Install winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
5
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full Wheel — If Equipped
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
mode.
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
WARNING!
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” only. With these spares, do not drive more than
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/ 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
80D18 103M.
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
5
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
first opportunity.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
WARNING!
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Inspare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
first opportunity.
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
Tire Spinning
Tread Wear Indicators
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or to help you in determining when your tires should be
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop- replaced.
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
5
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle mainbecomes a 1/16 of an inch (2 mm). When the tread is
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
WARNING!
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu- you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva- to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicator.” Refer to the Tire and Loading
WARNING!
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
of unapproved tires and wheels may change susequipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart expension dimensions and performance characterisample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictand Speed Symbol of a tire.
able handling and stress to steering and suspenIt is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
sion components. You could lose control and have
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
approved for your vehicle.
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
(Continued)
5
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Due to limited clearance, tire chains or traction devices
are not recommended.
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance interval. Remember, more frequent rotation
is permissible if desired. Also, correct for anything causing rapid or unusual wear prior to performing the tire
rotation.
NOTE: Each wheel on your vehicle contains a tire pressure sensor. The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
learns the location of each sensor though system proTire Rotation
gramming. Although not required, the manufacturer
recommends reprogramming the TPMS after rotating the TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
tires so that the system can relearn each sensor’s location. The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
See your authorized dealer for system reprogramming. technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
The front and rear tires are different sizes and cannot be monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
used in place of each other. Rotate the tires “side-to-side” wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
as shown in the diagram.
5
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
Receiver module
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
Four TPM sensors
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
Various TPMS messages, which display in the Driver
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
Information Display (DID)
there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
TPM Telltale Light
readings to the receiver module. It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on
your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure. The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
•
•
•
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom- the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
mended cold placard pressure.
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7.0 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are
(Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illumi- inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard presnates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recom- sure value.
mended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM Telltale
CAUTION!
Light to turn off. The system will automatically update and
the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the system • The TPMS has been optimized for the original
receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
warning have been established for the tire size
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
sensor to become inoperable. After using an afterpressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
pressure is sufficiently low enough to urn ON the TPM
your vehicle to your local dealer to have your
Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
sensor function checked.
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
TPM Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the
(Continued)
5
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure Premium System
or condition.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
while adjusting your tire pressure.
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes readings to the receiver module. It is particularly importhe tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. tant for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper prestread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and sure. The TPMS consists of the following components:
stopping ability.
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
• Receiver module
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those
• Four TPM sensors
in a different color in the DID graphic) to the vehicle’s
• Various TPMS messages which display in the Driver recommended cold placard pressure inflation value as
shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the system
Information Display (DID)
receives the updated tire pressures, the system will
• TPM Telltale Light
automatically update, the graphic display in the DID will
change color back to the original color, and the TPM
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
Telltale Light will turn off. The vehicle may need to be
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when order for the TPMS to receive this information.
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road Service TPMS Warning
tires. In addition, the Driver Information Display (DID)
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will
will display a ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message and a graphic
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
pressure values changing color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ mesDriver Information Display (DID) will display a ⬙SERsage will also be displayed.
VICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five
5
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
received.
The DID will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is
no longer exists, the TPM Telltale Light will no longer
detected. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no
message is then followed with a graphic display with
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place
pressure values still shown. This indicates that the presof the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
following:
but they may not be located in the correct vehicle
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed.
the TPM sensors.
General Information
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
materials that may block radio wave signals.
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or following conditions:
wheel housings.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
• This device must accept any interference received, Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
including interference that may cause undesired op- your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
eration.
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the followPoor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
ing licenses:
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
United States
MRXMERCTX1
symptoms, try another brand of “premium” gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Canada
2546A-MERCTX1
Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world
have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which
8.4L Engine
define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced
emissions, engine performance, and durability for your
The 8.4L engine is designed to meet all
vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasoemissions regulations and provide excellines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are
lent fuel economy and performance when
available.
using high-quality premium unleaded
gasoline with an octane rating of 91 or
higher.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
5
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should
clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than
10% ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% ethanol
genates such as ethanol.
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
• Change the engine oil and oil filter.
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso- • Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
line containing up to 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with
engine controller memory.
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle LimMore extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
ited Warranty.
exposure to E-85 fuel.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
MMT In Gasoline
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
• Operate in a lean mode.
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
• Poor engine performance.
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
E-85 perform the following:
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
• Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer).
5
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether Fuel System Cautions
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
CAUTION!
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
• Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel
door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the
door.
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
pipe seals the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refueling.
NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located in the allowing the flapper door to open.
driver’s door map pocket).
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
2. Open the fuel filler door.
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
NOTE: A funnel is provided (located in the trunk in the
spare tire area) to open the flapper door to allow for
emergency refueling with a gas can.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
5
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release procedure by following the
proceeding steps.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Locate the carpet access door (on the right side inner
trim panel of the trunk).
Carpet Access Door
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
3. Pull the edge of the access door on the right side inner 4. Pull the release cable to release the fuel door.
trim panel to expose the emergency release cable.
5
Release Cable
Edge Of Access Door
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Return the release cable to the original position (inside
the inner trim panel) and push the carpet back into the
original position.
Fuel Door Open
Carpet Into Original Position
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground)
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
Wheels OFF The Ground
None
Front
Rear
All
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing, make sure all four
wheels are off the ground.
Manual Transmission
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT RECOMMENDED
OK
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
GROUND CLEARANCE
The front and rear fascias and side sills ride low and
ground clearance is limited.
CAUTION!
Damage to the front and rear fascias and side sills can
occur if you disregard the low ground clearance in
these areas of your vehicle. Pay close attention when
parking to avoid running into parking curbs. Exercise caution when entering or exiting steep driveways, or when pulling off the road onto soft shoulders.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHER . . . . . . . . . . .290
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions. . . . . . . . . .295
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .290
▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . .297
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .303
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .308
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .294
6
290 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher
may wear down your battery.
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
center of the instrument panel above the climate controls. IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning potential for overheating by taking the appropriate acflasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- tion.
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
• On the highways — Slow down and use the highest
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
gear possible.
turn off the Hazard Warning flasher.
• In city traffic — While stopped, put the transmission
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for • In city traffic — While moving, shift into the highest
gear possible to reduce engine RPM.
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even an impending overheat condition:
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 291
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a properly calibrated torque wrench.
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat Torque Specifications
from the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
107 Ft-Lbs (145 N·m)
1/2” x 20
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
19 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
6
292 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each against the wheel.
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 293
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located in the left side of the trunk.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws
or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service
Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
6
Tire Service Kit Location
294 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to
this position for air pump operation only. Use
the Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting
this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Tire Service Kit Components
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Sealant Bottle
Deflation Button
Pressure Gauge
Power Button
5 — Mode Select Knob
6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
8 — Power Plug (located on the bottom side of the Tire Service Kit)
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and
turn to this position to inject the Tire
Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the
tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose)
(6) when selecting this mode.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 295
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release
the Power Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire
Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
6
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at
tire application use and need to be replaced after each
the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
use. Always replace these components immediately at
assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to
your original equipment vehicle dealer.
“Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F)
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
296 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and
properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air
Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob
(5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to
avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit
Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than ¼”
(6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4” (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 297
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye,
and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with
plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or
skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there
is any contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
(Continued)
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat
6
298 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
on the ground. This will provide the best positioning 4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated
valve stem.
tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
necessary to place the valve stem in this position
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
before proceeding.
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
in Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition
nails) from the tire.
in the OFF position.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
4. Set the parking brake.
Deflated Tire:
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire
Service Kit.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
Sealant Mode position.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
• After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
deflated tire.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 299
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
tire.
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve 1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70
Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.
seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant
Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant
Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease
Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the
actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
empty.
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
available. Make sure the engine is running before 2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediturning ON the Tire Service Kit.
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
use. Call for assistance.
6
300 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire 3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vepressure within 15 minutes:
hicle.”
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
CAUTION!
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrument panel.
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
Tire Service Kit components which may cause
permanent damage to the kit.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 301
(D) Drive Vehicle:
(E) After Driving:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire, Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
Mode position.
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90
km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to
follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve
stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
6
302 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
panel after the tire has been repaired.
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire 6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
and loading information label on the driver-side door
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as posopening.
sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom- NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authomended inflation pressure before continuing.
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 (F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
Volt outlet.
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
the vehicle.
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
service center.
of it accordingly.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 303
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
the front of the housing. Push the bottle into the
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
bottle is locked into place.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be hurt by the fan.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started, ignite
and damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may
be used to obtain a start from another vehicle. This
type of start can be dangerous if done improperly,
so follow this procedure carefully.
• Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watch bands or bracelets that might make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
seriously injured.
6
304 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: The battery is located underneath an access Connecting The Jumper Cables
panel inside the rear compartment on the left side of the
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
vehicle. A remote battery terminal is located in the engine
such as watchbands or bracelets that might make an
compartment for jump-starting.
inadvertent electrical contact.
2. When boost is provided by a battery in another
vehicle, park that vehicle within booster cable reach,
but without allowing the vehicles to touch one another.
3. Set the parking brake, place the transmission in NEUTRAL, and turn the ignition OFF on both vehicles.
4. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical loads.
Battery Location
5. Remove the plastic fuse cover to gain access to the
remote jump-start positive (+) post in the engine
compartment. Refer to the following illustration for
remote jump-starting connections.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 305
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
6. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
7. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
Remote Jump Start Connections
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
8. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
9. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
6
306 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
10. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then 4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle
battery.
with the discharged battery.
11. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
in the reverse sequence:
you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 307
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between 1st gear
and REVERSE, while gently pushing the accelerator. Use
the least amount of pressure to maintain the rocking
motion, without spinning the wheels, or racing the
engine.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between 1st gear and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
6
308 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck. And do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Only use flatbed
equipment. Always comply with applicable state or local
towing ordinances.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 8.4L . . . . . . . . . .311
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . .312
▫ Hibernation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .315
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
▫ Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
7
310 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . .356
▫ Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
▫ Taillamp, Tail/Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
▫ Rear Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
▫ Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
▫ Backup Lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
▫ Front Headlamp, Front Park/Turn Signal
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 311
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 8.4L
7
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Coolant Pressure Cap
Engine Oil Dipstick
Power Distribution Center
Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post
6
7
8
9
— Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir
— Engine Oil Fill
— Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
— Air Cleaner Filter
312 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
CAUTION!
To meet new government regulations and promote
cleaner air, your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Prolonged driving with the light on could cause
onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system further damage to the emission control system. It
monitors the performance of the emissions and engine could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
control systems. When these systems are operating prop- vehicle must be serviced before any state emissions
erly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and tests can be performed.
fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
If the light is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage
current government regulations.
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system required.
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light. It will also
store diagnostic codes and other information to assist EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
your service technician in making repairs. Although your PROGRAMS
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 313
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
ready for testing.
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
happen:
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
not proceed to the I/M station.
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
following:
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
position or start the engine. This means that your
not crank or start the engine.
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed
to the I/M station.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
7
314 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal attempting any procedure yourself.
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine penalties being assessed against you.
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the
knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 315
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
CAUTION! (Continued)
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the oil level is approximately five minutes after a
7
316 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change interbefore starting the engine after it has sat overnight. vals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months,
Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will whichever occurs first.
give you an incorrect reading.
Engine Oil Selection
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground also For best performance and maximum protection under all
will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Add types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
oil only when the level is below the SAFE mark.
recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12633.
The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic
0W-40 or equivalent engine oil.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 317
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
SAE 0W-40 engine oil such as MOPAR® or Pennzoil
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
Ultra® is preferred for use in all operating temperatures.
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended your area.
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
Engine Oil Filter
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa- The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
tion.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
Materials Added To Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
7
318 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recomRefer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
mended.
maintenance intervals.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
WARNING!
CAUTION!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Some aftermarket air cleaners and filters can cause
mass air flow sensor issues which can lead to a
driveability problem or a limp home condition.
Maintenance-Free Battery
The top of the maintenance-free battery is vented, and
must be replaced with a vented battery.
The battery is located underneath an access panel inside
the rear compartment on the left side of the vehicle. A
remote battery terminal is located in the engine compartEngine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
ment for jump-starting. Refer to “Jump-Starting ProceThe quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters dures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be information.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 319
To gain access to the battery, remove the floor portion of
the rear compartment carpet.
Battery Location
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
7
320 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Hibernation Mode
of storage time without losing radio and engine controller adaptive memory. Using this feature is an alternative
to disconnecting the battery.
NOTE: This vehicle is designed to sit in storage with a
fully charged battery for up to 30 days. If you plan to
store the vehicle longer than 30 days, we recommend
doing one of the following:
• Disconnect the battery.
• Use the battery charger.
• Put the vehicle into Hibernation mode (3-month
charge).
To Activate Hibernation Mode
1. Cycle the ignition switch to (ACC).
The Hibernation mode feature conserves battery power
when storing the vehicle. It allows for up to three months 2. Select Hibernation mode within the Driver Information Display (DID).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 321
3. Press the right arrow button on the steering wheel
controls for one second. Vehicle will countdown from
ten seconds and enter Hibernation Mode.
NOTE: You may press the right arrow button on the
steering wheel controls during the countdown to abort
Hibernation Mode.
To Deactivate Hibernation Mode
1. Press the RKE UNLOCK button to unlock the vehicle.
2. Press the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
7
322 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 323
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perforClean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and
help reduce streaking and smearing.
Adding Washer Fluid
Wiper Blades
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield or rear window.
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment on the passenger side of
the vehicle. Be sure to check the fluid level in the
reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from windshield washer solvent (not engine coolant (antithe windshield or rear window. Make sure that they are freeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to flush
not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid out the residual water.
damaging the blade. Keep the wiper blade out of contact
with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
7
324 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 325
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
7
326 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam- Cooling System
age:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or cycle the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 327
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
condenser/radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden
needed to be added to the system please contact your
hose vertically down the face of the condenser/radiator.
local authorized dealer.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubIf the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
leaks.
MS.90032).
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
maintenance intervals.
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
Coolant Checks
7
328 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Selection Of Coolant
CAUTION! (Continued)
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
(Continued)
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 329
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc- • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deioning this extended maintenance period, it is important that
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conformwill reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
ing to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
engine cooling system.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainthat meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan- tain the proper level of protection against freezing acdard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive NOTE:
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
Material Standard MS.90032.
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stanneeded to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
dard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
7
330 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to insure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 331
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS.90032
should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporno need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant
7
332 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti- • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
expansion bottle must also be protected against freezONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
ing.
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
sions.
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
Brake System
To ensure brake system performance, all brake system
components should be inspected periodically. Refer to
“Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance
intervals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 333
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Master Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level Check
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up
to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused
by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately Use only the manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
if the brake system warning light indicates system fail- Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
ure.
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Use
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per- of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling
point or unidentified as to specification, may result in
forming underhood services.
sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking.
7
334 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a accident.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in an accident.
(Continued)
Change Brake Fluid
Brake fluid will tend to absorb moisture from the atmosphere over time. If the fluid becomes contaminated with
water, brake performance will deteriorate. Therefore, the
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 335
brake fluid must be changed at the intervals specified in
the “Maintenance Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance
Schedule” for further information. See your authorized
dealer for service.
Manual Transmission
Transmission Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid in the transmission when performing
other underbody services.
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug located on
the left side of the transmission. The fluid level should be
approximately 1/4 in (6.4 mm) below the bottom of the
fill hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper
level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or damage to the
transmission. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and
Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Change Transmission Fluid
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. If contaminated with water, change the
fluid immediately. See your authorized dealer for service.
Hydraulic Clutch
Master Cylinder – Clutch Fluid Level Check
NOTE: DO NOT overfill transmission, damage can The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated
occur.
volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder
reservoir. In the event of leakage or wear, use only the
7
336 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Axle
Axle Lubricant Level Check
Check the exterior of the axle for evidence of gear oil
leakage every 12 months or 6,000 miles (10 000 km). This
check should be made with the vehicle level and on the
ground or raised on an axle and wheel type hoist. The
axle lubricant level should be between the bottom of the
filler plug and a point approximately 3/8 inch (9.5 mm)
below the filler plug. If adding axle lubricant, use only
the manufacturer’s recommended axle lubricant. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
Using axle fluid other than the manufactured recommended fluid may cause a shudder/noise issue. refer
to “Fluids Lubes and Genuine Parts” in “ Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Change Axle Lubricant
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. Change the lubricant immediately if
contaminated with water. See your authorized dealer for
service.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 337
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside • Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contamiyour paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
nants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi- • Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
tions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
7
338 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a
non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor
Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives
or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND
WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis
this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 339
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Leather or Vinyl Seat/Trim Care and Cleaning
Leather is best preserved by regular cleaning with a
damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an
abrasive and damage the leather surface and should be
removed immediately with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils
can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR®
Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking the leather with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean the leather. Application
of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the
original condition.
Glass Surfaces
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
7
340 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or Seat Belt Maintenance
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
directly on the mirror.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
buckles do not work properly.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 341
WARNING! (Continued)
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Aero Group (Front Splitter) — If Equipped
The front splitter will not flex or compress against
impacts from the front. If an impact does occur, have the
splitter inspected. A cracked or delaminated splitter
should be replaced.
7
Front Splitter
Always leave ample room and be sure to educate anyone
you allow to operate the vehicle.
342 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Use care when approaching parking blocks, tall
speed bumps and garage curbs. These surfaces can
damage your splitter.
Use caution when driving up to sloped surfaces or over
speed bumps. Approaching a speed bump or a slope at a
slight angle may improve your clearance.
CAUTION!
• Hard contact with steep ramps may cause damage
to your splitter.
• Replace rub strips when they are worn down to 1/8
inch (3 mm) on the front edge. This will avoid
damage to the carbon fiber panel.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 343
WARNING! (Continued)
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle. This
center contains fuses and relays.
7
Power Distribution Center
Cavity
Relay
3
—
Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
Mini-Fuse
Description
—
Rad Fan
344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Relay
4
—
5
—
6
—
7
—
8
—
9
10
11
12
—
—
—
—
Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
Jumper Black
25 Amp
Clear
Mini-Fuse
Description
—
Rad Fan Rly High
—
ABS/ESP Pump Feed
—
Starter
—
CBC (Ext. Lighting #1)
—
CBC (Ext. Lighting #2)
—
—
—
—
Washer Pump
CBC (Power Lock)
B+ Jumper
ABS/ESP Valve Feed
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 345
Cavity
Relay
13
—
Cartridge
Fuse
—
14
15
16
17
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
18
19
20
21
22
23
—
—
—
—
—
—
30 Amp
30 Amp
30 Amp
20 Amp
—
—
Pink
Pink
Pink
Blue
Mini-Fuse
Description
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
25 Amp circuit breaker
—
—
—
—
—
15 Amp Blue
Horn
A/C Clutch
Diagnostic, Fuel Door, Stop Switch
KIN, RF Hub
Power Seats
Driver Door Mod
Passenger Door Mod
Rear Window Defroster
Wiper
B+ Jumper
HVAC MOD, Cluster, ICS-Switch Bank
7
346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Relay
24
—
Cartridge
Fuse
—
25
—
—
26
—
—
27
—
—
28
29
—
—
30
—
31
32
—
—
—
40 Amp
Green
20 Amp
Yellow
—
Jumper Black
Mini-Fuse
Description
25 Amp
Clear
25 Amp
Clear
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
—
—
PCM-Powertrain Control Module
Fuel Pump
ASD #1
ASD #2
Spare
HVAC Blower
—
RR Power Outlet, Adj. Pedals, UCI
—
—
B+ Jumper
B+ Jumper
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347
Cavity
Relay
33
—
34
35
36
37
38
—
—
—
—
—
Cartridge
Fuse
20 Amp
Yellow
—
—
—
—
—
39
40
41
42
—
—
G8VA
G8VA
—
—
—
—
Mini-Fuse
Description
—
Run Acc relay
—
—
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp Red
—
—
—
B+ Jumper
Spare
ORC Mod Run
Cluster, Camera
Active Damping Suspension
7
HVAC Module, In Car Temp, Blower Relay
Spare
Run/Start
Fuel Door
348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Relay
Mini-Fuse
Description
—
Cartridge
Fuse
—
43AC
(Forward
Fuse)
43BE
(Rearward
Fuse)
44AC
(Forward
Fuse)
44BE
(Rearward
Fuse)
45
46
47
2 Amp Grey
SCCM
—
—
10 Amp Red
Corax
—
—
10 Amp Red
Rear View Mirror, Aux Port Jumper.
—
—
10 Amp Red
IBS
—
—
—
—
—
—
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
PCM-Powertrain Control Module, Fuel Pump Relay.
ESC Module, Stop Lamp Switch
ORC Module, Passenger Seat OCM
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349
Cavity
Relay
48
49
—
—
Cartridge
Fuse
—
—
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
HC Micro
HC Micro
HC Micro
HC Micro
HC Relay
HC Micro
HC Micro
G8VA
G8VA
HC Micro
HC Micro
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Mini-Fuse
Description
10 Amp Red
25 Amp
Clear
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
SCCM
Amplifier
Rad Fan
Rad Fan Relay SER/PAR
Starter Relay
Rear Window Defroster Relay
Rad Fan Relay High
Wiper ON/OFF
Wiper LO/HI
Horn Relay
A/C Clutch Relay
HVAC Blower
Fuel Pump
7
350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Relay
61
62
63
64
65
G8VA
G8VA
HC Micro
HC Micro
G8VA
Cartridge
Fuse
—
—
—
—
—
Mini-Fuse
Description
—
—
—
—
—
Run Relay #1
Run Relay #2
ASD #1
ASD #2
Run Accy #1, Pop Up, Driver Door Window Switch
NOTE: A 15 Amp fuse for the radio system is located
in-line at the battery positive terminal.
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351
CAUTION! (Continued)
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
• Check that the radiator coolant level of protection is to
at least -20°F (-29°C).
• Make sure that all tires are inflated to the optimum
pressure.
• Wash and wax the vehicle to protect the finish.
• Store the vehicle in a dry, well-ventilated location.
• Move the wiper blades away from the windshield.
• Block the wheels. Do not apply the parking brake.
We recommend that you follow these guidelines for • Cut blocks of plywood about the same size of the tires.
storing your vehicle for extended periods.
Cover each block with indoor/outdoor carpeting and
place them between the tires and concrete. This will
• Fill the fuel tank. This will prevent water condensation
prevent tire flat spotting.
inside the tank. If you plan to store your vehicle more
than two months, add an anti-oxidant fuel stabilizer to • For long-term storage, remove the tires and put the
the fuel tank.
vehicle up on blocks. Stack the tires on plywood and
• Change the oil to remove any corrosive combustion
related acids in the crankcase.
cover with a tarp to prevent flat spotting.
7
352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If the vehicle will be subjected to freezing temperatures, either remove the battery and store it in a dry,
well ventilated area or connect a trickle charger (1.5
Amp) with automatic shutdown / overcharge protection to the battery. However, do not leave the trickle
charger hooked up to the battery without being
plugged in to a 110 Volt AC outlet, as this will result in
further drain on the vehicle’s battery. If the vehicle is
not going to be driven in the next three weeks, perform
the battery recharge procedure in the Service Manual.
Then, either disconnect the battery at the negative
terminal or use the “Battery Save Feature” to conserve
battery power. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures/
Battery Save Feature” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”
for further information.
• Cover the vehicle whenever possible to prevent accidental damage to the finish.
NOTE: Disconnecting the battery causes the engine control system to lose memory of some “learned” functions.
After reconnecting the battery, the engine may run rough
until the control module “relearns” these functions. Using the Battery Save Feature will prevent the engine
controller from loosing its memory.
CAUTION!
Use care when disconnecting the remote positive
cable. It is connected to the battery and can short out
to any metal on the vehicle. Always tape or wrap the
exposed cable end to prevent electrical shorts.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353
Check the battery every four to six weeks to ensure that 3. Make sure that the HOOD, LIFTGATE, and DOOR
the voltage is above 12.10 Volts. The voltage will drop
switches are in adjustment. Perform the quick system
more rapidly in hot temperatures. If battery voltage
check, which follows:
drops below 12.10 Volts, follow the battery recharge
Use the remote transmitter to set the alarm. If the alarm
procedure in the Service Manual.
SET light comes on and flashes, the system is operating
NOTE: To help prevent the battery from discharging properly. If not, there is a problem with a switch or the
during shorter periods of inactivity, perform the follow- system. See your authorized dealer for service.
ing:
If you plan to store the vehicle longer than 30 days, we
1. Make sure that the liftgate, hood, doors, windows are recommend using Hibernation Mode to conserve batcompletely closed.
tery power. Refer to “Hibernation Mode” in Maintenance Procedures for further information.
2. Make sure that Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is operating and that the battery is good.
7
354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Message Center Indicators
Cluster
Gauge Pack
Heater Control
Interior Lamp
Courtesy Foot Well Lights
Cargo Lamp (Coupe Liftgate)
Bulb Number
103
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
103
37
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
168
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355
Exterior Bulbs
Low/High Beam Headlamp
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp
Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)
Front Side Marker Lamp
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
Tail/Stop/Turn Signal Lamp
Rear Marker Lamp
Backup Lamp
License Lamp
Bulb Number
HID (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
2821M
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
2821M
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
7
356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Taillamp, Tail/Stop Lamp
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
Front Headlamp, Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
Rear Turn Signal Lamp
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
Backup Lamps
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
Engine Oil With Filter
We recommend you use synthetic SAE 0W-40, API Certified.
Transmission
We recommend you use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Rear Axle
We recommend you use Castrol SAF-XJ/SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Gear and Axle Lubricant.
Cooling System *
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000
Mile Formula or equivalent).
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S.
16 Gallons
Metric
60.6 Liters
11 Quarts
10.4 Liters
3.4 Quarts
3.2 Liters
1.5 Quarts
1.4 Liters
16 Quarts
15 Liters
7
358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000
Mile Formula OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032.
We recommend you use a full synthetic 0W-40 engine oil such as MOPAR®
or Pennzoil Ultra or equivalent engine oil.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filters.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs, see your authorized dealer.
We recommend you use Unleaded 91 Octane Only or Higher.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
(Continued)
7
360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component
Transmission
Rear Axle
Brake/Clutch Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use Castrol SAF-XJ/SAE 75W-140 Synthetic
Gear and Axle Lubricant.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Brake and Clutch Fluid DOT 4
Motor Vehicle.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid + 4,
MOPAR® or ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
▫ MAINTENANCE CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
8
362 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
At Each Stop For Fuel
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this • Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent mainaccuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving. Inspection and service should also be done • Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
anytime a malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
whichever comes first.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 363
Once A Month
At Each Oil Change
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or • Change the engine oil filter.
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
• Inspect the exhaust system.
even if it occurs before your next scheduled service.
NOTE: Also, inspect the exhaust system if you notice a
• Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals
change in the sound of the exhaust system, or if the
as required.
exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
• Inspect the brake hoses.
master cylinder, power steering, and transmission, and
add as needed.
• Inspect the suspension components.
• Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct • Lubricate door hinges and check springs.
operation.
• Check the engine coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
• Check power steering fluid level.
8
364 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
150,000
42,000
30
70,000
144,000
36,000
24
60,000
138,000
30,000
18
50,000
132,000
24,000
12
40,000
126,000
18,000
6
30,000
120,000
12,000
Or Months:
20,000
114,000
6,000
108,000
Miles:
10,000
102,000
MAINTENANCE CHART
Change the engine oil and
engine oil filter.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Rotate the tires, rotate at the
first sign of irregular wear, even
if it occurs before scheduled
maintenance.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the exhaust system.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Change Brake Fluid
Adjust the parking brake on
vehicles equipped with four
wheel disc brakes.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
150,000
42,000
30
70,000
144,000
36,000
24
60,000
138,000
30,000
18
50,000
132,000
24,000
12
40,000
126,000
18,000
6
30,000
120,000
12,000
Or Months:
20,000
114,000
6,000
108,000
Miles:
10,000
102,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 365
Change the engine oil and
engine oil filter.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Change the manual transmission fluid.
Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary.
X
X
Change the rear axle fluid.
Inspect front suspension, tie
rod ends, and boot seals, for
cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if
necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8
X
X
Replace the engine air cleaner.
Replace the air conditioning
filter.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
150,000
42,000
30
70,000
144,000
36,000
24
60,000
138,000
30,000
18
50,000
132,000
24,000
12
40,000
126,000
18,000
6
30,000
120,000
12,000
Or Months:
20,000
114,000
6,000
108,000
Miles:
10,000
102,000
366 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Change the engine oil and
engine oil filter.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect and replace the PCV
Valve if necessary
Replace the spark plugs **
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 120 months if not
done at 150,000 miles
(240,000 km).
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
monthly intervals do not apply.
X
X
X
X
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 367
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .371
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 䡵 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .375
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .372
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .375
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .372
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .376
9
370 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 371
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
372 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- FCA US LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (855) SRT–TEAM
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 373
Mexico, D. F.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Service Contract
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
9
374 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 375
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
dealer, and the manufacturer.
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- 9153),
operating at its best.
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: AdminisREPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
MOPAR® PARTS
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immeIf NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in defect to the Canadian government should contact Transa group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
9
376 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acdiagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procomplete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward lan- cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety
tips.
guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 377
Call toll free at:
Treadwear
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
9
378 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
380 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .328
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Air Bag Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Air Bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .318
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
INDEX 381
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .129
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .22
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Storing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . .81
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .118
. . . . . . . . .357
. . . . . . . . .357
. . . . . . . . .317
. . . . . . . . .236
10
382 INDEX
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .151
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .73
Using The Top Tether Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . .
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . .
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . .
Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . .
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.338
.323
.196
.335
.265
.373
.330
.326
.328
.357
.327
.330
.327
.331
.331
.330
.330
.328
INDEX 383
Key Fob Emergency Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
.336
.152 Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
.134 Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
.371 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .129
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Electric Remote Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .114
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Emergency Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Dipsticks
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Disposal
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Corrosion Protection .
Cruise Light . . . . . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10
384 INDEX
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .312
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
INDEX 385
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Fluid Level Checks
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .358
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Filler Door (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Gauge . . . . . . .
Materials Added
Methanol . . . . .
Octane Rating . .
Requirements . .
Tank Capacity . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.149
.280
.278
.277
.277
.357
.342
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®)
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . .
Gauges
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information . . . . . . . . . . .
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.120
.278
.277
.278
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.149
.144
.148
.196
.339
10
386 INDEX
Ground Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Headlights
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . .106
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .106
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Instrument Panel And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .16
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .16
INDEX 387
Remote Battery Replacement
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . .
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . .
Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . .
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.22
.13
.11
.11
.15
.14
Lane Change And Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
10
388 INDEX
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .151
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .108
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .151
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .144
Loading Vehicle
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Low Tire Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). . . . . . .151
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
INDEX 389
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
MOPAR® Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 Parking On Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
10
390 INDEX
Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .255
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .129
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .22
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)
Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.261
.330
.195
.196
.193
Rear Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Rear Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .16
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .16
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .194
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
INDEX 391
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Seat Belt
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .41
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
10
392 INDEX
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Selection Of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
SENTRY KEY®
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .151
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Shift Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Emergency (Jump Starting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .194
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
INDEX 393
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag . . . . . . . . .45
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . .254
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . .
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . .
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome .
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.271
.149
.377
.261
.268
.270
.247
.249
.263
.267
.267
.247
.293
.286
.308
.287
.287
.232
.243
10
394 INDEX
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .22
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .22
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .20
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Uconnect®
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Uconnect® Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Uconnect® Voice Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .17
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Vinyl Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .144
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
INDEX 395
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Reset Auto-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Wipers, Intermittent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
FCA US LLC
15ZD-126-AC
Third Edition
Printed in U.S.A.